TS Plumbing

BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITAL MEDICAL
CENTER - PROPOSED TRAUMA CENTER

Baguio City, Philippines
Technical Specifications
for
Plumbing Systems
Prepared by: MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES, INC.

25F Chatham House
116 Valero corner V.A. Rufino Street
Salcedo Village, Makati City
1227 Philippines
06 April 2018
JOVITO C. BORJA
Sanitary Engineer
Reg. No. : 2032

PTR No. : 6619218
Date Issued : 05 January 2018
Issued at : Makati City
TIN No : 119-875-472
100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Section 15007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers
2. Section 15010 - General Provisions
3. Section 15040 - Plumbing System Start Up
4. Section 15052 - Common Work Result for Plumbing
5. Section 15057 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing

Equipment
6. Section 15061 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment
7. Section 15073 - Vibration and Seismic Controls For Plumbing Piping

And Equipment
8. Section 15076 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
9. Section 15111 - General –Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping
10. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping
11. Section 15145 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties
12. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
13. Section 15155 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
14. Section 15160 - Storm Drainage Piping
15. Section 15165 - Storm Drainage Piping Specialties
16. Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixture
17. Section 15444 - Packaged Booster Pumps
18. Section 15450 - Water Storage Tank
19. Section 15480 - Firestopping
20. Section 15745 - Air to Water Heat Pump Water Heaters
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Acceptable Equipment & Suppliers SECTION 15007
PART 1 - INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
1.1 The Stipulated Bid Sum shall be for base Specification equipment only. Where a choice of
base bid equipment is given, indicate selection included in Stipulated Bid Sum by submitting
this Section. Failure to complete and submit this section will indicate that the Contractor has
agreed to provide the base bid equipment specified in each specification section, listed in each
equipment schedule, and/or shown on the Drawings.
1.2 Submit the following list of base bid suppliers in accordance with Bid requirements.
Spec. Base Bid Alternative Deduction

Reference Equipment Manufacturer Manufacturer from Base Bid
Section or Supplier /Brand Price
15070 Starters, GE Eton ABB
Contactors & Siemens Schneider
Motor Control
Centre
15082 Plumbing Thermobreak -

Insulation Xcellon
15410 Strainers Spirax -
Mueller
Armstrong
15410 Pressure Gauges Trerice -
Weksler
WIKA
15140 Expansion Victaulic -
Joints & Mason
Guides
15061 Hangers Grinnell Locally
Unistrut fabricated of
Caddy-Erico equivalent
quantity
15150 Bell and Spigot AB &I
C.I. Pipes Charlotte
15150 Hubless Cast Tyler

Iron Pipes and Fittings Charlotte
Pont-A-Mousson
15140 Polypropelene Pipes and Al Faidro Belden Neltex

Fittings Bugatti Honeywell Atlanta
Georg Fischer Thermovar
Aquatherm Wexan
(Fushiotherm) Pilsatherm
Plastherm
MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 3

S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\04-PLUMBING\15007-
Acceptable Equipment and Suppliers.doc
Spec. Base Bid Alternative Deduction

Reference Equipment Manufacturer Manufacturer from Base Bid
Section Or Supplier /Brand Price
15140 Flexible/Composite Pipes Georg Fischer Unitec
(Pex, Pert, PB) Aquatherm Thermovar
15145 Ductile Iron Zenith EMC Conglin
Pipe Nippon
Lino
15410 Water Press. Bermad OCV Amico

Reducing Claval Z-Tide
Valves Tozen Singer
ARI
15140 General Duty Valves (GOHC, Nibco Honeywell Weilong
15111 Ball, Globe, Check, Y- Tozen (Japan) (Bronze only)
Strainers) Crane Maple
Showa (Japan) Okl
Nenutee
15140 Butterfly Tozen (Japan) Belimo (Enye)
15111 Valves (Manual and Motorized) Victaulic Gala
Kennedy Honeywell
15160 HDPE Pipes & Fittings for Wavin Kingbull

Drainage Geberit
Aquatherm
Jalsir
15150 Polyvinyl Chloride Emerald Unitex Moldex

Pipes & Fittings Neltex
Atlanta
15444 Packaged Booster Pumps Aurora Goulds

Grundfos WILO
Penta Air Ebara (Japan)
Armstrong
Paco
Peerless
15155 Drainage Zurn Flamingo JPI
Products JR. Smith Jaman- Metma
Wade Eurobrass
Kessel Unilex

Spec. Base Bid Alternative Deduction from

Reference Equipment Manufacturer Manufacturer Base Bid Price
Section Or Supplier /Brand
15145 Meters Arad B Meters E-Jet
Badger B-meter (Metroasia)
Crane
15410 Flush Valves Toto -
Crane
Rigel
15410 Plumbing Toto -

Brass Kohler
15410 Plumbing Toto -
Fixtures (less drinking cooler) Kohler
American Standard
15415 Grease Interceptor / Oil AGI Jaman- JPI

Interceptor Unilex Eurobrass
KESSEL Flamingo
JR. Smith Weda
Zurn
15480 Fire Stopping Materials Rectoseal

Metacaulk
Specseal -
Tremco
15200 Vibration Isolator, Seismic Mason Industries Kinetic Noise

Bracing Metraflex Control Isolation
Vibration Eliminator Technology
VCMI Youil
15430 Water Heaters AO Smith

Heat Pumps
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING General Provisions SECTION 15010
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 W ORK INCLUDED ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 2
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................. 3
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS .......................................................................................................... 4
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................... 4
1.6 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................................... 4
1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT W ORK ................................................................................................ 4
1.8 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................... 4
1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ....................................................................................................... 5
1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ....................................................................................................... 5
1.11 SEPARATE PRICES .................................................................................................................... 5
1.12 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS ......................................................................... 5
1.13 SAMPLES .................................................................................................................................. 6
1.14 EQUIPMENT SELECTION............................................................................................................. 6
1.15 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION ....................................................................................... 7
1.16 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL........................................................................................................ 8
1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................................................... 14
1.18 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF W ORK BETWEEN THE TRADES ...................................................... 15
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 21
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 21
PART 3 – EXECUTION......................................................................................................................... 22
3.1 PROGRAMME .......................................................................................................................... 22
3.2 PROGRESS REPORT ................................................................................................................ 22
3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES ................................................................................ 22
3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS................................................................................................................. 25
3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES ........................................................................................................... 25
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING ......................................................................................................... 26
3.7 PROTECTION........................................................................................................................... 26
3.8 PAINTING, LABELING AND FINISHING ........................................................................................ 26
3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE ................................................................................................... 29
3.10 COMPLETION .......................................................................................................................... 29
3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER....................................................................................................... 30
3.12 PROTECTION OF OWNER’S PREMISES ...................................................................................... 30

General Provisions.doc
SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. These Specifications are an integral part of the Contract Documents. The Articles of
Agreement, Conditions of Contract, Form of Contract, General Provisions and
Preliminaries, Instruction to Bidders, General Requirements apply to all Division 15
Specification Sections.
B. Work in the Specifications is divided into descriptive Sections which are not intended
to delegate functions or work to any specific Contractor or identify absolute
contractual limits between Contractors. The requirements of any one Section apply to
all other Sections, for example: the motor service factor requirement. Refer to other
Divisions and Sections to ensure a completed operational product and fully
coordinated standard of work.
C. The direction to 'provide' equipment, materials, products, labour and services shall be
interpreted to 'supply, install and test' the Division 15 work indicated on the Drawings
and specified in the Specifications.
D. Provide and include in the Contract Price Division 15 work including mechanical
components and normal system accessories not shown on the Drawings or stipulated
in the Specifications, and required to ensure completed operational systems and a
fully coordinated standard of Work acceptable to the Consultant and all authorities
having jurisdiction.
E. The work essentially shall include, but shall not be limited to the following items:
1. Submission of technical specifications and samples of all supply items for

approval by the Consultant(s).
2. Submission of shop drawings of all items for fabrication for approval by the
Consultant(s) prior to fabrication.
3. Application and securing of required permits and licenses including facilitating
inspection by governing agencies and payment of all fees levied therewith.
4. Supply, installation and testing of the following:
a. Potable water supply system complete in all respects including but

not limited to submittals, shop drawings, piping, water meters, valves,
bibbs, insulation, all accessories required for complete and
operational of the system.
b. Water service connections including but not limited to water meters,
float valves. Any and all other works involve in providing the
complete operation of the water supply system.
c. Soil waste and vent system complete in all respect including but not
limited to connection to existing sewer, submittals, shop drawings,
pipes, fittings, valves, cleanout, drains, etc. Complete and
operational.
d. Storm drainage system complete in all respect including but not
limited to connection to existing storm drainage, submittals, shop
drawings, pipes, fittings, valves, cleanout, drains, etc. Complete and
operational.
5. Termination of motors/equipment including provision of necessary connectors
and insulators.
6. Roughing-ins and wiring from Motor Control Center to motor controllers.

7. Provision for interfacing with others services and trades.

8. Fire-stopping of all vertical and/or horizontal pipe penetration to fire rated
areas.
9. Miscellaneous Works:-
a. Hacking of non-structural wall and partitions to provide opening for

pipes and sealing of opening around sleeves and pipes including
provision of escutcheon plates.
b. Grouting of opening in walls after such pipes are in place and sealing
of all such openings if not used.
c. Flushing of newly installed plumbing system.
d. Restoration/repair of existing structures damaged during installation.
e. Miscellaneous items and other provisions required to maintain
cleanliness level of adjacent areas during the entire duration of
construction.
f. Full instruction after completing the job to the Maintenance Personnel
regarding operation and maintenance operation of the entire
installation. Provide complete printed/type instruction booklets
(hardbound) covering maintenance operation and adjustment of each
piece of equipment and list of each spare parts.
g. Provide UL listed fire stopping materials for pipe penetrations.
10. Testing and commissioning.

11. Submission of three (3) sets of operations and maintenance manuals and
three (3) copies of electronic file together with the as-built plans.
12. Training of Owner’s plant operators on the system’s maintenance and
operation. Training shall be conducted by both the Contractor and Principal
Supplier.
13. Coordination with other trades for special requirements for this package. (i.e.
concrete pads, block-outs, relays, etc.)
14. Provision of guarantee as specified in the Specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the current applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the authority
or authorities having jurisdiction, the rules, regulations and requirements of the utility
companies serving the project and the Owner’s insurance underwriter.
B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where

requirements differ, the more stringent apply.
C. Should any change in drawings or specifications be required to comply with the

governing regulations, notify the Project Manager prior to submitting bid.
D. All equipment and installations shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of the
Standards and Codes listed under items 1.4 and 1.5.
E. Execute work in strict accordance with the best practices of the trades in a thorough,
substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen. Provide a competent,
experienced, full-time Superintendent who is authorized to make decisions on behalf
of the Contractor.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A. Abbreviations:
1. PS Philippines Standard
2. PEC Philippine Electrical Code (Part 1:1992, Part 2:1988)
3. ANSI American National Standards Institute
4. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
6. IEC International Electro-technical Committee
7. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
8. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
9. NEC National Electrical Code
10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
12. UL Underwriters Laboratory
13. AMCA Air Moving & Conditioning Association
14. ADC Air Diffusion Council
15. ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
16. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineers
17. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
18. AWWA American Water Works Association
19. PSME Philippine Society of Mechanical Engineering Code
20. NPCP National Plumbing Code of the Philippines
21. NBCP National Building Code of the Philippines
22. FCP Fire Code of the Philippines
23. IPC International Plumbing Code
24. IMC International Mechanical Code
25. FM Factory Mutual
26. NBS National Bureau of Standards
27. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers (Handbook)
B. Definitions
1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to Engineer for review,

refer to Architectural General and Special Conditions for proper procedures.
2. FURNISH means to supply all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus,
controls, tests, accessories, and all other items customarily required for the
proper and complete application.
3. INSTALL means to join, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect
together before testing and turning over to Owner, complete and ready for
regular operation.
4. PROVIDE means to FURNISH, INSTALL and TEST.
5. AS DIRECTED means as directed by the Project Manager, or his
representative.
6. CONCEALED means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed
behind wall furring or within drywall partitions, furniture wiring management or
installed within hung ceilings.
7. SUBMIT means submit to Project Manager for review.
8. “Architect”, “Project Manager/Engineer”, “Consultant”, “Employer’s
Representative”, “Owner”, the Party or Parties responsible for interpreting,
accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under “this Contract”.
9. Sub-Contractor, “Contractor”, the party responsible for the installation.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Provide new materials and equipment of proven design and quality. Provide current
models of equipment with published ratings certified by recognized local and
international testing and standards agencies.
B. Workmanship and installation methods shall conform to the best modern practice.
Employ skilled tradesmen to perform work under the direct supervision of fully
qualified personnel.
C. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturers written recommendations.
D. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA and other industry standards in the selection and
provision of equipment, materials, pipe and system components.
E. Meet ASTM, ANSI, AWWA Standards for the supply and installation of all equipment.
F. Meet the additional selection, sizing and performance criteria specified in this
Specification.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Meet the requirements and recommendations of local Municipal Ordinances.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and schedule Division 15 work with all other work in the same area or with
work which is dependent upon Division 15 work so as to facilitate mutual progress.
B. Identify and resolve interference problems prior to prefabrication and installation of

equipment. Submit interference drawings for review upon Consultant Request.
C. Examine the site and all Contract Documents prior to bid submission. No allowance
will be made for any difficulties encountered due to any features of the building,
methods of construction, site or surrounding public and private property which existed
up to the bid close.
1.7 CHANGES TO CONTRACT WORK
A. Do not proceed with any changes to the Work without written authority from the
Owner.
B. Follow procedures outlined in Bidding and Contract Requirements for administration

and execution of Contract revisions.
C. Quotations for changes to Division 15 work shall be based on methods either

approved or directed by the Consultant.
1.8 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT
A. Where equipment has been pre-purchased by the Owner for installation by Division
15, assume complete responsibility for acceptance, delivery schedule, off loading,
storage, rigging, installation, protection, start-up and warranty of this equipment, all as
if the equipment were provided by Division 15.
B. The responsibilities of the equipment supplier are delineated in the pre-purchase

documents which are available for Contractor review during the bid period.
C. The following equipment has been pre-bid in order to ensure equipment delivery in
time to meet the building construction schedule.

D. Include in Contract Price, the cost of the following pre-purchased equipment.
E. The Owner shall bear the equipment and FOB job site shipping costs directly.
F. Request from the Owner, full details of the equipment and the manufacturer's Shop
Drawings. Include related information in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
G. Assume extensions of warranties to meet specified times.
1.9 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
A. The Defects Liability Period for the purposes of this Contract shall be a period of
twelve months from the ‘Date of Practical Completion’, providing that during such
period the Contractor shall have remedied and made good all faults or defects as
described below, to the Employer’s Representative satisfaction.
B. During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall at his own cost remedy and
make good with all possible speed any faults or defects in the Plant or Works due, in
the opinion of the Employer’s Representative, to faulty materials, workmanship or
design and, shall indemnify the Employer and/or the Main Building Contractor against
any damage or injury to the Building contents and/or occupants arising as a result of
such faults or defects.
C. If the Contractor fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable time the
Employer may proceed to do so at the risk and expense of the Contractor and without
prejudice to such other rights as the Employer may have under the Contract.
D. Other requirements shall be as described in the relevant section of the Specification.
1.10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. Submit Supplementary Sanitary Bid Form. Failure to comply with the stated
requirements of the Bid Form may nullify the bid.
B. The Bidder is invited to submit additional alternative prices not specifically requested
with the Bid.
C. Alternative prices may be used to establish the lowest Contract Price.
D. The lowest or any Bid will not necessarily be accepted.
1.11 SEPARATE PRICES
A. Submit separate prices on the Bid Form and express as a credit or an extra to the
Stipulated Bid Sum.
B. Calculation of the Contract Price will include separate prices consistent with their
acceptance or rejection by the Owner.
1.12 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER AND SUPPLIERS
A. Equipment and materials are specifically described for the purpose of indicating
standards of quality and workmanship. Base Bid on the items specified and shown
on Drawings.
B. Alternatives for equipment or materials considered equal in quality and performance

may be submitted with the Bid Form. Supply with each alternative, following bid
submission, upon request by Consultant, the following information:

1. Details of manufacture
2. Dimensions including required clearance
3. Performance data
4. The cost saving for piping and electrical changes imposed by the alternative
5. The effect upon and cost to other trades
C. Where alternatives are accepted, there will be no further cost allowances for
subsequent changes in Division 15 work or other Contracts to make the alternative
complete and equal to the specified equipment and materials.
D. If alternative equipment, differing from that which is shown on Drawings is accepted,

prepare when requested, equipment layouts at no extra cost. Show clearly in plan,
elevations and sections, all equipment details including dimensional changes. Show
location changes to pipes and wiring and the effect of these changes on the building.
Drawings shall be 1:50 scale.
E. The right is reserved to accept or reject any alternative.
1.13 SAMPLES
A. Within one month following the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for
review one set of labeled samples as follows:
1. Cast iron pipes and fittings

2. PVC pipes and fittings
3. Valves, strainers vents and drains
4. Pipes supports
5. Galvanized steel pipes and fittings
6. Black steel pipes and fittings
7. Floor drain gratings
8. Rainwater outlet gratings
9. Thermal and acoustic insulation materials
10. Vibration isolators
11. Seismic Hangers both for horizontal and risers
12. For other samples required refer to specification.
B. The Employers Representative reserves the right to require samples which show the
fabrication techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the design of
accessories and other auxiliary items, before any installation work process.
C. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer’s Representative for endorsement,

manufacturer’s specification and installation instructions for trade products.
1.14 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
A. All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this Specification and the relevant
drawings and to the approval of the Employer’s Representative.
B. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the Contract are minimum
capacities and the Contractor shall check them with the Employers Representative,
taking into account any variations which may be made to the systems during the
progress of the Contract Works.
C. The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate at site that the duties required of the
equipment are obtainable.
D. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space allocated for
the accommodation of such plant and equipment, taking into account the requirement
of access for maintenance purposes.

E. In selecting makes and types of equipment, the Contractor shall ascertain that
facilities for proper maintenance, repair and replacement are provided.
F. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified
or detailed in the drawing, which requires any redesign of the system, drawings
showing the layout of the equipment and such redesign as required therefore shall be
prepared by the Contractor at his own expenses. Where such approved deviation
necessitates a different quantity and arrangement of materials and equipment’s from
that originally specified or indicated in the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and
install any such additional materials and equipment’s required by the system at no
additional cost.
G. Equipment catalogue and manufacturer's specifications must be submitted for

examination and details shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer’s
Representative before any equipment is to be ordered.
This shall include all information necessary for the Employer’s Representative to
ascertain the equipment comply with this Specification and drawings. Data and sales
catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.
H. Before ordering equipment, the Contractor shall provide the Employers

Representative with full details of the weights and characteristics of the equipment for
purposes of determining floor loading, power consumption etc.
1.15 PACKING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. All materials, equipment, components and accessories shall be delivered to the Site
in a new condition, properly packed and protected against damage or contamination
or distortion, breakage or structural weakening due to handling, adverse weather or
other circumstances and, as far as practicable, they shall be kept in the packing
cases or under approved protective coverings until required for use.
B. Any items suffering from damage during manufacture, or in transit, or on site whilst in
storage or during erection shall be rejected and replaced without extra cost to either
the Employer or the Main Contractor unless either of them, or their respective
representatives, cause such damages.
C. In the case of such materials, equipment, components and accessories which

originate overseas:
1. The said items shall be adequately and securely packed for safe
transportation with due regard to the climatic conditions encountered in transit
and on arrival.
2. British Standard 1133 and supplements, or other comparable and acceptable
code, shall be used as a guide for the standard of packing and package
required. All bright polished or plated parts shall be treated with suitable
corrosion preventative.
3. At the time of shipping, each consignment shall be documented with packing
lists and bills of lading which shall contain full statements of the packages
consigned with particulars of the dimensions, weights, contents, shipping
marks and approximate value of each package shall be provided in duplicate
to the Main Contractor.
D. Where it is stipulated in the Specification or elsewhere in the Contract that packages,

pallets, casks or other packaging or handling materials are returnable, then the
Contractor shall forthwith upon receiving written notice to that effect from the Main
Contractor, remove the same from the site as any other place where the materials,
equipment, components and accessories have been unpacked.

E. Neither the Employer nor the Main Contractor shall be liable for loss or damage to or
return of any packages, pallets, casks or other packaging or handling materials where
the Contractor fails to collect as notified by the Main Contractor.
F. After delivery to site and prior to installation the Contractor shall ensure that all
materials and equipment are properly stored on site to avoid mechanical damage and
the adverse affects of heat, humidity, and etc. The Contractor shall provide proper
shelving and racking to support and protect the equipment and materials. All
electrical equipment shall be stored covered in its original packaging or by plastic
sheeting.
G. The Contractor shall apply an approved protective crating or fix some other protective
material to the materials, equipment, components and accessories so as to protect
them after installation. In the event that the Contractor fails to do, the Contractor shall
repair to the satisfaction of the Employers Representative or supply free of all charge
any replacement required to substitute for any part of the materials, equipment,
components and accessories which may have been damaged in whole or in part as a
result of such failure as directed by the Employers Representative and shall without
prejudice to such other liabilities under this Contract, pay for all expenses and
outgoing of the Employer or the Main Contractor incurred in respect of the removal
and disposal of the damaged parts and the installation of the substitute parts.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the off loading and handling of cables on site
and shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new drums and properly
protected against mechanical damage and loss with manufacturer's seals still intact.
Partly used drums of cables which have already been used elsewhere shall not be
acceptable unless special approval is given by the Employers Representative in
writing.
I. Waterproof protection shall be applied to all electrical busbar and switchgears,

thermal insulation, and other materials susceptible to moisture damage during and
after installation until handover to the Employer.
J. The Contractor shall be responsible for unpacking and removal from site all
temporary protective covers prior to the handover of the Installation to the Employer.
K. The Contractor shall accept at job site the sanitary fittings from the Sanitary Fitting
Supplier and store on Site. The sanitary fittings shall be well protected by the Sanitary
Contractor from damage of any kind. After installation, each fixture shall be well
protected from damage and spoilage by effects of weather and subsequent
construction and the finishing activities of other trades.
L. All fixtures or fittings damaged due to improper installation, storage or handling will be
rejected by the Employers Representative and shall be replaced with new,
undamaged items as specified. Any costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.16 DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL
A. Interpretation of Drawings
1. The Specification and any drawings or other documents attached thereto and
issued by the Employers Representative shall be deemed to include, whether
or not specifically mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or work as
may be necessary for the satisfactory completion of the Works. The
Contractor shall make due allowance in his Bid for such materials or work.
2. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and Specification, or

where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain
written clarification on such matters before submitting his Bid. Any such
clarification from the Employer’s Representative to the Contractor or vice

versa dated prior to the submission of the Bid, shall form part of the Contract
Documents. If no clarification is requested and obtained by the Contractor
the Employer’s Representative reserves the right to select either option
irrespective of the allowances the Contractor has made in his bid.
B. Bid Drawings
1. Bid Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be

installed. Run and arrangement of piping and the positioning of apparatus
shall be approximately as indicated.
2. The Bid Drawings are primarily intended to enable the Bid to prepare his
estimate and submit Bid. Where runs of piping, cables, conduits, etc. are
shown to small scale these do not necessarily indicate exact positions, and all
offsets fittings and accessories that may be required are not necessarily
shown. The Bid Drawings are based on agreement with the Employer taking
into account co-ordination with other services and no alteration in principle
will be allowed without approval.
3. If directed by the Employer’s Representative, the Contractor shall, without

extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to
execute properly the work and prevent conflicts with the works of other
trades.
4. After the award of the Contract, the Employer’s Representative will, without
charge, furnish two copies of the drawings and Specifications and will within a
reasonable time also furnish such further drawings as are reasonably
necessary to enable all the Employers Representative's Instructions to be
carried out. The Employer’s Representative will also provide all details which
in the opinion of the Employer’s Representative are necessary for the
execution of any part of the work.
5. Additional copies of the drawings and the Specification can be provided to the
Contractor upon written request to the Employer’s Representative, but the
Employer’s Representative will charge for such additional copies at current
commercial rates.
C. Contractors Drawings
1. The Contractor shall prepare, or be responsible for obtaining, the following

drawings:
a. Installation Drawings.
b. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings.
c. Builders Work Drawings.
d. Progress Drawings
e. Record Drawings and Charts.
2. The symbol notation on all drawings shall be the same as the Bid Drawings.
New symbols, not previously used on the Bid Drawings shall be agreed with
the Employer’s Representative. All drawings shall have a stenciled title block
and stenciled notes.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the accuracy of all

dimensions abstracted from Bid Drawings and used in the preparation of his
drawings.

D. Installation Drawings
1. The Contractor shall, before the relevant work proceeds, prepare and submit
for approval by the Employer’s Representative, all Installation Drawings
showing details of his proposals for the execution of the Contract Works. The
Installation Drawings shall be based on the Bid Drawings, and shall take into
account any modifications, either to the building or to the installation which
may have taken place, and incorporate details of the actual items of plant and
equipment to be installed.
2. They shall be in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to enable
the Contract Works to be installed, and shall indicate all piping and fittings
necessary for installation, and also particular installation methods to be
applied in certain instances.
3. The Contractor shall similarly prepare all necessary Schedules of equipment,

and necessary schematic diagrams, including internal diagrams for items of
electrical equipment and diagrams showing the inter-connections between
different items.
4. The Contractor’s Installation Drawings shall be prepared to a scale of 1:100

for all services in the building and 1:50 or 1:20 for all plant rooms and similar
spaces, unless otherwise approved by the Employer’s Representative.
5. The Contractor shall produce and submit for approval drawings detailing and
dimensioning the following:
a. Site distribution, piping routes.

b. General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the
Contract.
c. Schematic distribution for main and sub-main distribution.
d. Waste, soil, vent and rain water piping layouts and details.
e. Domestic water piping layouts and details.
E. Manufacturer's Shop Drawings
1. The Contractor shall submit for review shop drawings of any item of plant or
equipment produced by a manufacturer or equipment supplier indicating
principle dimensions, fixings, connections and all other relevant details.
These shall include drawings of all control, and instrumentation panels,
pumps and other equipment as requested by the Employer’s Representative.
2. The Contractor shall provide engineering drawings showing the construction,

external and internal layout of panels and wiring diagrams comprising internal
wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring diagrams, for the
complete system in the panels. The drawings shall also show all electrical,
pipework and capillary connections from the panels to external equipment.
F. Contractor’s Approval of Manufacturer's Shop Drawings
1. All drawings, schedules or other information provided by Manufacturers,

Nominated Suppliers, Nominated Sub- Contractors or Specialist Contractors
shall be approved by the Contractor and such approval shall ensure that all
requirements of the Contract documentation have been incorporated.
2. When this procedure has been completed, the Contractor shall forward paper
prints of the approved drawings, or copies of the approved schedules or their
information to the Employer’s Representative in a similar manner to that described for
the Installation drawings.

3. No order to a Manufacturer, Nominated Supplier, Nominated Contractor or

Specialist Contractor, to commence manufacture/installation shall be given
until written approval has been given by the Employer’s Representative.
4. Any costs arising from failure to meet the above conditions shall be borne by
the Contractor at no cost to the Contract.
G. Builders Work Information & Drawings
1. The Contractor shall provide fully detailed Builders Work drawings to show
requirements for architectural or structural provisions necessary to facilitate
the execution of the Contract Works, and allow their integration into the
project. These drawings shall show dead and live loads of all plant, and fully
dimensioned details of all plant bases, wall chases, and penetrations.
2. This information shall be prepared in sufficient time for incorporation in the

Main Building Contractors programme.
3. In cases where preliminary builders' work and structural information has

already been given by the Employer’s Representative, such information shall
be confirmed by the Contractor (including confirmation of weights of items of
equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.) and incorporated on his drawings.
4. The Contractor shall provide templates for, and supervise all builders' work
required, including drilling and plugging of walls, floors and ceilings for
securing of brackets, and other builders work as is considered normal to the
trade.
5. The details required by the Main Building Contractor are to be provided as

directed, which may require advance information to be provided by the
Contractor before the Works defined in this Specification are to commence.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking any details that may have
been given before commencement of the Works to ascertain that the said
advance details are correct.
6. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs associated with the late submission
or omission of builders work information.
H. Progress Drawings
1. The Contractor shall arrange for a full set of white prints of Installation
Drawings to be kept on the Site showing the progress of all work in
connection with the Contract. Such prints shall be kept up-to-date before
each site progress meeting, and all conduit, cable, pipe and trunking runs,
positions of equipment and apparatus shall be recorded on the drawings as
they are installed.
2. The Progress Drawings shall be available for inspection at any time by the
Employer’s Representative and Main Building Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall include for his representative to keep a diary recording
the progress of the works and details of all instructions received. The diary
shall be at the disposal of the Employer’s Representative as and when required.
I. Record Drawings and Charts
1. The Contractor shall issue draft copies of Record Drawings, showing the
whole of the services as installed, to the Employers Representative one
month prior to the start of commissioning.

2. Within one month of the Practical Completion of the installations, the

Contractor shall provide to the satisfaction of the Employer’s Representative
one durable plastic negative and one copy CD (Autocad) and four complete
final sets of white prints showing the whole of the services installed. Prior to
this formal issue, the Contractor shall submit two copies of his proposed
finalized Record Drawings to the Employer’s Representative for approval.
3. Two sets of drawings for symbols shall be submitted, one of the same size as
the bid drawings, the other set shall be of A4 size suitable for eventual
inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
4. The complete symbol notation used for all Record Drawings shall be
computer generated.
5. The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation
of the Works as each section is completed. The Employer’s Representative
shall be allowed to inspect the drawings on request during their preparation.
6. In addition to the foregoing Record Drawings, the following charts and

drawings shall be laminated in plastic and hung in the plant rooms and
switchgear rooms:
a. Plant room key Drawings: showing all plant item numbers, locations
and duties.
b. Control Schematics
c. Electrical system schematic diagrams
d. Sequence of Operation
J. Submission of Drawings and Equipment for Review
1. Information for review must be submitted in accordance with the agreed

programme of work and in packages relating to complete buildings or
previously agreed parts of the building.
The packages must include:

a. Installation drawings.
b. Builders work drawings.
c. Associated Manufacturer's shop drawings.
d. Technical information of proposed equipment and materials.
e. Any other relevant information required by the Employer’s
Representative.
Each submission must be accompanied by a letter which:

a. Identifies the contents of the submission in detail.
b. Refer to previous submissions of the information and any relevant
correspondence.
c. Refers to the purpose of the submission and any other requirements
of the Contractor.
K. Employer’s Representative's Approval
1. The Contractor shall obtain the Employer’s Representatives review of his

information before it is used for ordering, fabrication or installation. The form
of review will be an examination of the drawings and/or samples by the
Employer’s Representative to ensure that the design criteria and engineering
principles described in the Bid documents have been correctly interpreted
and applied by the Contractor.
2. The review will not entail any checking of working dimensions on the
drawings.

3. The Contractor must carry out his own checking procedure before submitting
information for review, this checking must cover not only his own work, but
that of Manufacturers and Specialists for whom he is responsible.
4. The review of information by the Employer’s Representative will in no way

relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for error in his work or of his other
contractual responsibilities and obligations.
5. The Contractor shall allow a period of 1 month in his programme for the
Employers Representative to review and return the Contractor submission
with comment. The Contractor shall also indicate in his programme time
allowed for resubmission of drawings not allowed to be used for installation
by the Employer’s Representative.
L. Review Procedure for Contractor Submission
1. Three (3) sets each of hard and soft copies of all information and drawings
shall be submitted to the Employer’s Representative. One copy will be
retained by the Employer’s Representative and the other copy will be returned
to the Contractor.
The information will be returned and marked either:
Stamp Interpretation
Approved/Unaltered Fabrication, manufacture, or construction
may proceed providing submittal complies
with the Contract Documents.
Approved with corrections Fabrication, manufacture, or construction
/comments as noted prior to may proceed providing submittal complies
general issue with the Contract Documents and the
Engineer’s notation are complied with.
For Re-submission The submittal does not comply with the
Contract Documents; do not proceed with
fabrication, manufacture, or construction
.The work and shop drawings are not
permitted at the job site. Re-submit
appropriate shop drawings.
2. Modifications and variations found to be necessary after the initial review has
been given must be re-submitted for further approval in the above manner.
3. Revision marks must be included on all revised drawings, and the revisions
must be fully and clearly described.
4. Six copies of all reviewed drawings and noted as “Approved/Unaltered” shall

be submitted to the Employers Representative for general distribution to the
Main Building Contractor and other interested parties.
M. Coordination
1. The Installation Drawings shall illustrate that the Contractor design has been
coordinated and integrated with that of other Contractors, the structure, and
building elements, before work commences. In addition to the Works for
which he is responsible, the drawings must show the structure, adjacent
building elements and the zone required by other Contractor to install,
operate and maintain their equipment.

2. If the Contractor deviates from the design intent of the Bid drawings, he shall
ensure that this deviation either does not involve a change in any of the other
Contractor installations or that any change necessary in the other Contractor
installations does not incur an additional cost to their Contract.
3. The Contractor shall be fully liable for any cost incurred through his lack of
coordination.
1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Before the handover of the installation, the Contractor shall prepare complete
Operation and Maintenance Manuals which are to be printed in English for all the
installations. When these manuals have been agreed in details, the Contractor shall
submit to the Employers Representative three copies thereof suitable bound. The
Operating and Maintenance Manuals must be handed over before the Date of
Completion.
B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals should comprise the following:
1. A hard cover giving:

the name of the development
the title of the document
the name, address and contact number of the installation contractor
2. Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including contact
telephone numbers for normal and emergency use.
3. Contents page.
4. Description of the installation.
5. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.
6. Operating instructions including details of any automatic control system.
7. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule of

routine maintenance.
8. Test reports and commissioning records.
9. Recommended spare parts and lubricants.
10. List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address and local
agent, if applicable.
11. Manufacturer’s literature suitably indexed to include shop drawings, wiring

diagrams, performance curves, etc.
12. List of as-installed drawings.
13. A complete valve schedule.

C. The manual should be produced on A4 size paper, all sections should be suitably
separated and readily identifiable or pages should be numbered consecutively and
page numbers included in the contents page.
D. The Contractor shall provide a copy diskette of the complete text of the operation and
maintenance manuals.

1.18 PROPOSED SEPARATION OF WORK BETWEEN THE TRADES
A. The specifications describe in detail the proposed work included for each trade when
the main Contractor divides the work among their Contractors. The following
summary is an outline of the work to be “Provided”, “Furnished” or “Installed” by each
of the trades included in the contract, i.e., Plumbing & Sprinkler, (Div. 15) HVAC,
Building Management System (Div. 15), Electrical (Div. 16) and other Divisions 1-14.
B. In the absence of more detailed information, consider the list as specific instructions
to include such work in the named contract.
C. Abbreviations are as follows:
1. “OD” - Other Division of the Contract (not Electrical or Mechanical)

2. “Plb” - Plumbing – Division 15
3. “Spr” - Sprinkler – Division 15
4. “Mech” - Mechanical – Division 15
5. “Elec” - Electrical – Division 16
6. “F” - Furnished
7. “I” - Installed
8. “P” - Provided (Furnished and Installed)

ITEM OD Plb. Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks
Motors for Mechl.,

Plumbing, Fire Protection
Equip’t _ P P P _
Feeder Cables from Cables to be terminated in the

Electrical Panels to Motor Motor Controls by each trade.
Controls _ _ _ _ P
Motors for Mechl., Specification and drawings

Plumbing, Fire Protection delineate detailed exceptions.
Equipment _ P P P _
Wiring for Mechl.,

Plumbing, Fire Protection
Equip’t Motors including
the feeder cables from
motor controller
_ P P P _
Wiring for Mech’l Specifications and drawings

Equipment Motor delineate in detail the work to be
Controls and Alarms _ P P P _ performed by each trade.
BMS Control Field

Devices _ P P P P
DDC Field Controllers _ _ _ _ _
Wiring Terminations _ P P P P Contractor Who Supplied the

Panel will do the termination
Temporary Light and As per Contract Documents.

Power _ _ _ _ _
Temporary Water _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract Documents.
Toilets _ _ _ _ _ As per Contract Documents.
Temporary Fire As per Contract Documents.

Protection _ _ _ _ _
Hoisting P P P P P
Rigging P P P P P
Bracing of Building for

Safe Rigging P _ _ _ _

ITEM OD Plb Spr. Mech. Elec. Remarks
Cutting, Chasing & Cost where due to late

Patching P _ _ _ _ installation or improper
coordination of work is the
responsibility of the delinquent
trade.
Framed Slots and Includes drilling of holes when

Openings in Walls, required. Cost where due to late
Decks and Slabs P _ _ _ _ installation or improper
trade.
Sleeves P _ _ _ _
Waterproof Sealing of
Sleeves Slabs,
Decks and Walls _ P P P P
Fireproof Sealing of
Excess Openings in
Slabs, Decks and Fire _ P P P P
Rated Walls
Excavation and Backfill

Inside Buildings _ P P P P
Excavation and Backfill Coordination with the trades.

Outside Buildings Cost where due to late
P _ _ _ _ installation or improper
trade.
Keep Site and

Excavation Free From
Surface Water During
Construction P _ _ _ _
Fastenings _ P P P P
Supports P P P P P

Concrete Encasement
of Conduits _ _ _ _ P
Below Grade
Drainage Inside
Building _ P _ _ _
Base Flashing of Cap flashing by Trade.

Electric Conduits
Through Roof (Pitch
Pockets) P _ _ _ _
Electrical Handholes,
and Covers _ _ _ _ P
Finish Painting (does

not include I.D. marks
or color coding
specified and provided
by each trade) P P P P P
Finished Walls and Supplying list of location of all

Ceiling Access Doors, items requiring access doors
Panels and Supporting included in the Division requiring
Frames P _ _ _ _ same.
Plaster Rings and Plaster rings and frame

Frames I _ _ _ F furnished in electric only for
lighting fittings which are so
equipped.
Rubbish Removal P P P P P Where one trade furnishes and

another installs, the installing
trade removes the shipping and
packing materials which
accumulate.
Special Tools for

Equipment
Maintenance F F F F F
Electric Power
Consuming Items and
Controls for Other than
Mechanical Equipment,
e.g. Motorized Doors P _ _ _ _

Concrete Foundations, Furnishing exact dimensions of

Pads, Pits, Curbs, and anchors, vibration mounts and
Bases Inside Buildings templates included in each trade
providing the associated
P _ _ _ _ equipment.
Concrete Foundations Furnishing exact dimensions of

Pads and Bases anchors, vibration mounts and
Outside Buildings templates included in each trade
P _ _ _ _ providing the associated
equipment.
Masonry Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishings of covers and

associated frames included in
each trade.
Sump Pits P _ _ _ _ Furnishing of covers and

associated frames included in
each trade.
Concrete Lined
Trenches inside
Building Foundations P _ _ _ _
Prime Coat Painting _ P P P P
Field Touch-up Painting

of Damaged Shop
Coats _ P P P P
Rustproofing Field Cut

and Assembled Iron
Supporting Frames and
Racks _ P P P P
Grating and Exterior

Wall Louvers P _ _ _ _
Duct Connections to
Louvers _ _ _ P _
Equipment Delivered Except Mechanical and Electrical

and Set in Place P _ _ _ _ Equipment by Divisions 15, & 16.
Vinyl Tape or Painted

Color-

Coding, Banding
Arrows and Similar
Identification for
Mechanical and
Electrical Work P P P P P
Underfloor and Header Responsibility for coordination is

Duct _ _ _ _ P included in this Section.
Lighting Fixtures _ _ _ _ P See Drawings.
Elevators, Escalators Power connections to disconnect

and Dumbwaiters switch included in Electrical
_ _ _ P _ Section.
Catwalks and Ladders

to Electrical Equipment P _ _ _ _
Food Service Line connections included in each

Equipment P _ _ _ _ trade.
Services to Food
Service Equipment _ P P P P
Laundry Line connections
Equipment P _ _ _ _ Included in each trade.
Services to Laundry
Equipment _ P P P P
Roughing to Equipment
Furnished by Others _ P P P P
D. Each Division is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination

information to any other Division supplying work to accommodate that Division.
E. For items which are to be installed but not furnished as part of this Division, the electrical
work includes:
1. Coordination of their delivery.

2. Unloading from delivery trucks driven into any point on the property line at grade
level.
3. Safe handling and field storage up to the time of permanent placement in the
project.
4. Correction of any damage, defacement or corrosion to which they may have
been subjected.
5. Field make-up and internal wiring as indicated for their proper operation.
6. Mounting in place.
7. Connection to building wiring, including the purchase and installation of all
termination junction boxes necessary to adapt and connect them to this wiring.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Provide products and materials that are new, clean, free of defects, and free of
damage and corrosion.
B. Products and materials shall not contain asbestos, PCB, CFCs, Halons, or any other
material which is installed considered hazardous by the authority having jurisdiction.
C. Replace materials of less than specified quality and relocate work incorrectly installed
as directed by the Engineer or its authorized representative.
D. Provide name/data plates on major components of equipment with manufacturer's

name. Model number, capacity data and electrical characteristics attached in a
conspicuous place.
E. Install materials and equipment with qualified trades people.
F. Maintain uniformity of manufacturer for equipment used in similar application and

sizes.
G. Fully lubricate equipment where required.
H. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for installing, connecting, and adjusting equipment.

Provide a copy of such instructions at the equipment during installation.
I. Where factory testing of equipment is required to ascertain performance, and

attendance by the Owner’s representative is required to witness such tests,
associated travel costs and subsistence shall be paid for by the Contractor.
J. Equipment capacities, ratings, etc., are scheduled or specified for job site opening
conditions. Equipment sensitive to altitude shall be derated with the method of
derating identified on the submittals.
K. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed in mechanical equipment rooms shall be

NEMA type 1 gasketed. Enclosures for electrical equipment installed outdoors shall
be NEMA type 3R.
L. Energy consuming equipment shall meet local energy ordinances.

PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 PROGRAMME
A. Within 2 weeks of the letter of intent or award, the Contractor shall submit a
programme showing the details of delivery and required installation period for each
system.
These details shall also be forwarded to the Main Contractor, and the Contractor shall
work with the Main Contractor to produce an overall coordinated programme for the
works.
B. The Contractor shall make such labor available at all stages of the works to permit
the programme to be achieved and to carry out his work in accordance with the
requirements of the Main Contractor and Main Construction programme.
C. The Contractor shall include all key dates into his programmes including the dates
required of all Utility submissions and also the dates that permanent power,
permanent water etc will be made available for the project.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for informing the Main Contractor of his detailed
requirements in respect of fuel, water, drainage and electrical supplies, for the testing
and commissioning of the plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Employer’s Representative of any delays
caused by labor shortages, late delivery of materials and equipment, or the failure to
meet programme by any other contractor on site, which may affect his own
programme.
E. The programme shall be updated monthly.
3.2 PROGRESS REPORT
A. The Contractor shall submit two copies of the monthly report to the Employer’s
Representative containing:
1. Percentage of work completed including a BOQ comparison between and

actual and contracted work.
2. Description of executed work.
3. Problems or delay (if any) and how to solve these.
4. Special occurrences, accidents, etc.
5. List of drawings, also indicating revisions.
6. List of memos and instructions ordered by the consultant.
7. List of equipment and workers at the site.
8. Color photographs of the site showing necessary views of the work at not
less than 10 locations.
3.3 INSPECTION, TESTING AND CERTIFICATES
A. Periodic inspections of the work in progress will be made to check general conformity
of the work to the Contract Documents. Observed deficiencies will be reported.
Correct deficiencies immediately.
B. Meet the requirements of all laws, bylaws, codes, regulations and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Where the Contract Documents, instructions or the governing authorities require

Division 15 work to be tested, inspected or approved, give sufficient notice of its
readiness for inspection and schedule the date and time for such inspection.

D. Uncover Division 15 work that is covered up without consent, upon Consultant

request, for examination and restore at no extra cost to the Owner.
E. Furnish certificates and evidence that Division 15 work meets the requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Correct deficiencies immediately upon notification.
G. Cleaning and Flushing
1. The Contractor shall clean the entire installation including all sanitary fittings
and pipework, etc, after installation and keep them in a new condition.
2. All pipes, etc, shall be flushed through with water, rodded when necessary to
ensure clearance of debris.
3. Cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation

becomes completed.
H. Hydraulic Testing of Pipework
1. The Contractor shall carry out hydraulic test on the complete plumbing
systems and the drainage system to show that it is functioning satisfactorily
within the requirements of this Specification and local regulations.
2. The Contractor shall provide suitable test pumps and arrange for a supply of
water required in connection with testing of pipework. The test pump shall be
fitted with pressure gauges which shall be of suitable range for the pressure
being applied.
3. Hydraulic tests shall be carried out as the pipework is installed and shall be
completed before chases in walls and ducts are closed. Also test shall be
carried out prior to false ceilings and other finishes are installed.
4. All cold water and fire fighting pipework shall be hydraulically tested for a
period of not less than 6 hours to a pressure of not less than one and half
times the working pressure, but in any case the testing pressure shall not be
less than 150 PSI for cold water and 250 PSI for fire fighting. The Contractor
must record all test figures together with schedules of pipe lengths and
should note that testing shall be witnessed by the Employers Representative.
No pressure drop shall be allowed during the tests.
5. Testing apparatus shall be provided by the Contractor. Where any section of

pipework or equipment is unable to withstand the maximum pipework test
pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework test then that section of
pipework or equipment shall be re-tested at the appropriate test pressure.
6. The Sanitary Contractor must carry out any additional tests required by the
local authorities.
7. Drainage pipe shall be tested by filling the pipe with 3m. of water higher than
the test section and wait for 15 min, then check for leakage at every joints.
8. Testing of drainage systems shall be carried out in sections by dividing the

system horizontally. Each section shall comprise pipework and fitting for three
floors/storeys required for testing.
9. Drainage pressure pipe shall be hydraulic tested at minimum pressure 50

PSI.

10. On completion of the section of drainage pipework to be tested, blank off all
open ends of pipes and ensure that all access covers are securely tightened
so that they are airtight.
a. At the base of each stack, a drain bag or drain plug is inserted and a
small quantity of water allowed to settle above it so as to form a seal
that can easily be inspected if it leaks.
b. A drain plug should be inserted at the top of the stack and in the case
of rainwater pipes at every intermittent outlet with a small quantity of
water above it.
c. Remove the blank cap from one of the drain plugs (at the top of the
stack if possible) and connect the tube from a manometer gauge to it
or by passing the tube through one of the trap seals.
d. Blow air through the tube and reconnect at the manometer gauge to
obtain a reading of 38mm w.g. the level should remain for a period of
not less than five minutes without falling and without further air being
added.
I. Operation Tests
1. The Contractor shall ensure to the approval of the Employers Representative

that the installation or portion thereof has been set to work and complies with
all requirements including the following:
a. That the plant and apparatus is of robust construction and of capacity for
the duty specified.
b. That all valves, switches, controls, etc, are properly regulated and
capable of proper operation and in the case of valves that are capable of
tight shut-off.
c. That all apparatus is silent.
d. That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.
e. That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the relevant
clauses of this Specification.
f. That all pumps are properly aligned.
2. Should the results of these tests show that the pumps, etc or any other items
of equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or other performance figures
as given in this Specification, and as accepted in the Contractor bid, then the
Contractor shall adjust, modify and if necessary replace the equipment
without additional cost to the Contract in order that the required performance
is obtained. Should it be necessary for the Contractor to attend to items of
plant as described he will be responsible for cost for any damage or
deterioration to the building or any other services consequent on such
attendance.
3. The Contractor shall perform all tests and demonstrations as called for by the
local authorities.
4. Testing procedures shall be submitted two months after the approval of major
equipment to the Employers Representative for approval.
J. Supply of Testing Equipment
1. The Contractor shall provide all tools, pressure pumps, instruments and
recorders required to carry out the tests given in this Section.
2. All water and electricity required for testing purposes shall be supplied by the
Main Contractor.

K. Pretreatment
1. Prior to start-up and after satisfactory hydraulic testing, all piping systems
shall be flushed and drained at least once through to rid off contaminating
materials.
2. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced.
L. Disinfection
1. For Pipe Installation
a. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty
water does not appear at the points of outlet.
b. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine
solution containing or least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine,
and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to
stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200
mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.
c. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with
clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system.
d. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological
examination that contamination remains present in the system.
2. For Water Tank:
The entire interior of the tank shall be swabbed or sprayed with solution
containing 200 ppm of available chlorine and the solution allowed to stand for
3 hours before flushing and returning to service.
3.4 RESULTS OF TESTS
A. If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a satisfactory
manner nor providing the requirements of this Specification, the Employer’s
Representative shall decide whether this is due to incorrectness of faulty work by the
Contractor and if this be the case, the Contractor shall, when called upon, carry out at
his own expense such alterations, replacements and adjustments as may be required
to the Employer’s Representative’s complete satisfaction. The Employer’s
Representative decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final.
3.5 TEMPORARY SERVICES
A. Provide temporary mechanical services in accordance with the requirements of

Section 01500.
B. Make connections to temporary power source provided and provide extensions for
use by Division 15.
C. Install and maintain temporary fire protection services as required by the authorities
D. When the permanent water service is installed, it shall be used to supply water for the
use of Other Contractors.
E. Perform operations necessary for checking, testing and balancing after written
approval is given to start up systems. Ensure that care is taken to protect equipment
from damage and to prevent distribution of dust through duct systems.

F. Do not use permanent plumbing, heating or air conditioning systems for temporary
services during construction, except with written permission from Consultant.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Give notification in time to Other Contractors of openings required for Division 15

Work. Supply accurate details of location and size. When this requirement is not
met, bear the cost of cutting and patching.
B. In existing work, cutting, patching and restoration of finished work to original condition
will be carried out by Other Contractors at the expense of Division 15.
C. Obtain written Consultant approval before cutting openings through structure.
D. Where new work connects with existing and where existing work is altered, cut, patch
and restore to match existing work.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect all Division 15 work from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all
times.
B. Cover openings in equipment, pipes with caps or heavy gauge plastic sheeting until
final connections are made.
C. Repair any damage caused by improper storage, handling or installation of equipment

and materials.
D. Protect equipment, pipes and temporary services installed by Division 15 from

weather damage.
3.8 PAINTING, LABELING AND FINISHING
A. Materials
1. All parts of the work installed under this Specification shall be painted with
approved high quality enamel paints, except those items specified as being
painted by others or otherwise exempted from painting in this section of the
Specification.
2. Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature on the surface which it is
applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental conditions
in which it shall be located.
3. All paint used shall be of one approved manufacture, and finishes shall be full
gloss unless otherwise specified.
4. Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Contractor
shall submit the color scheme to the Employers Representative for approval.
5. Before ordering any painting materials, the Contractor shall submit the type
and manufacturer of all materials for approval.
6. The Contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from types
suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the environmental
conditions in each area.
7. The fire services equipment shall be painted in red color with two coatings of
red lead primer.
B. Plant, Machinery & Equipment
1. All items of plant, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex factory shall
be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel, except where the
manufacturer's standard finish is approved.

C. Exposed Metalwork
1. All exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and cleaned from rust, scale,
dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one undercoat and
one approved color finishing coat of full gloss enamel.
2. The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be an approved
galvanized iron primer.
3. The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork shall be approved as
suitable for the metal to which it will be applied.
D. Concealed Metalwork
1. All galvanized iron surface concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings, building
ducts etc. shall not be painted. All black iron and steel surfaces shall be wire
bushed and given one coat of zinc chromate or red lead.
E. Pipework & Metal Sheathing
1. Pipework and metal sheathing shall be painted as for exposed or concealed

metalwork as applicable.
2. Turned parts of valves, controls etc., shall be cleaned and polished to
approval.
F. Pipework Identification
1. All pipes etc. shall be identified in accordance with British Standards

1710:1984 or other comparable and acceptable code.
2. Circumferential bands of standard colors shall be not less than 100mm wide
on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and not less than 150mm wide on
pipes greater than 50mm nominal diameter.
3. Supplementary colors shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm wide
in the center of the ground color bands.
4. Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting colors in
accordance with the standard, in block letters not less than 15mm high for
pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40mm
high for larger pipes.
5. Identification bands shall be located where they are clearly visible in each
room or compartment through which the pipe runs, and shall be placed at
centers not exceeding 6m.
6. Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent
to each color band. Arrows shall be 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm
nominal diameter, and 150mm long on larger pipes.
G. Colour Schemes
1. The whole of the piping installation shall be painted in accordance with the
existing piping colors schemes wherever applicable and color coded as
follows:
Chilled water pipe - Green

Potable water pipe - Dark Blue
Non Potable Water Piping - Light Blue
Hot water pipe - White
Waste pipe - Brown
Soil pipe - Black
Vent pipe - Gray
Fire pipe - Red
LP Gas Pipe - Yellow
Electrical Conduit - Orange

Equipment shall be paint and color coded to BS 381C:1980 or the PSME Code as
follows:
Equipment Color No.
Switchboard and Control Electric Orange-White Interior

Panel
Electric Motors Primrose 310
Electric Conduits Light Orange 557
Pumps and tanks As for respective piping service -
All other equipment As directed -
H. Labeling
1. All plant and equipment provided under this Specification is to be labeled in

English as to duty or services, all such Labeling to correspond to schedules,
diagrams, etc. to be provided as part of the Record Drawings. Labels are of
white Traffolyte with black engraved lettering not less than 20mm high or as
otherwise required and approved.
2. Manufacturers' nameplate shall generally be provided for all plant and
equipment and shall show serial and model numbers and date of
manufacture.
3. All valves, motor starters, fans, distribution boards, gauges, contactors, cable
terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers shall have labels.
4. Labels should be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light
gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve box
where provided. These labels shall state the valve number.
5. Distribution boards, starters etc. shall be labeled to indicate the circuit
number, phase and item controlled.
6. Labels shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not
acceptable.
7. Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Employers Representative
prior to manufacture.
8. A complete valve schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built drawings and
this schedule shall clearly indicate the valve numbers, duty, function, size,
flow rate and any other relevant information necessary to allow the
Employer's plant operators to safely operate each valve and to subsequently
maintain or replace the valve as required.
9. The valve schedule shall clearly relate to the various system schematics to
enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.
I. Application of Painting
1. All paints shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.
2. All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch-primed to ensure correct
adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials for etch-priming shall be as
recommended by the paint manufacturers. Subsequent painting of
galvanized surfaces shall comply with this Specification.
3. Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be
thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust and
swarf. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease and
dirt.

4. When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved
primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have been
primed, the Sanitary Contractor shall notify the engineers so that an
inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the
undercoat and the finishing coats.
5. When the priming coat has been approved, one coat of an approved paint flat
undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the
Contractor shall ensure that the undercoated surface is rubbed flat and
smooth. Finally, two coats of an approved high gloss finishing paint shall be
applied when all dust has been removed.
6. Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of the
next coat. The minimum thickness of each layer to be 50u.
3.9 TEMPORARY AND TRIAL USE
A. Obtain written permission from Consultant to use and test permanent equipment and
systems prior to Substantial Performance acceptance by Consultant.
B. Consultant may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance.
Provide labour, fuel, material and instruments required for testing. Rectify incomplete
work immediately to the satisfaction of Consultant.
C. Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials
during temporary usage.
D. Clean and renew equipment and systems used prior to acceptance.
E. Warranty, including duration and commencement date, shall not to be affected by

start-up date of equipment.
3.10 COMPLETION
A. Remove all debris from inside Division 15 systems and equipment.
B. Rectify deficiencies and complete work before submitting request for Substantial
Performance inspection.
C. Follow manufacturer's written instructions regarding bearing lubrication. Remove

grease from pillowblock type bearings and install new grease before equipment is put
into operation.
D. Check and align all drives to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
E. Check and align all pumps to manufacturer's acceptable tolerances.
F. Remove all temporary protection and covers.
G. Remove oil and grease from equipment and bases.
H. Clean all fixtures and equipment. Polish all plated surfaces.
I. Change air and water filters.
J. Remove, clean and reinstall pipeline strainer screens.
K. Leave Division 15 work in as new working order.

3.11 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER
A. Submit to Owner, check lists for each system or piece of equipment, indicating that all
components have been checked and are complete prior to instruction period.
B. Thoroughly instruct the Owner in the safe and efficient operation of the systems and
equipment.
C. Arrange and pay for the services of qualified manufacturer's representatives to

instruct Owner on specialized portions of the installation, such as refrigeration
machines, boilers, automatic and water treatment.
D. Submit a complete record of instructions given to the Owner. For each instruction
period, supply the following data:
1. Date
2. Duration
3. System or equipment involved
4. Names of persons giving instructions
5. Names of persons being instructed
6. Other persons present
E. Submit receipted verification of completed training to Consultant prior to final release

of retentions.
F. Carry out instructional period during a period of 5 days scheduled at Owner's

convenience.
G. Video tape all instructional sessions and turn over copy of tape to Owner upon
completion of training period.
3.12 PROTECTION OF OWNER’S PREMISES
A. Adhere strictly to the Owner's requirements.
B. Confer with the Owner concerning schedule, dust and noise control prior to
commencing work in or adjacent to existing facilities where such work might affect
either those facilities or their occupants.
C. Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to occupants, public and
normal use of premises.
D. Provide temporary means to maintain security when security has been reduced by
Division 15.
E. Only elevators, dumbwaiters, conveyors or escalators assigned for Contractor's use

may be used for moving men and material within building. Protect walls of passenger
elevators, to approval of Owner prior to use. Accept liability for damage, safety of
equipment and overloading of existing equipment.
F. Provide temporary dust screens, barriers, warning signs in locations where

renovations and alteration work is adjacent to areas which will be operative during
work.
G. Drawings indicate approximate locations of known existing underground and above

ground facilities. Avoid damage to existing services. Bear cost of repairs and
replacements.

H. Immediately advise Consultant when unknown services are encountered and await
instructions.
I. Accept liability for costs incurred by the Owner in repairing and cleaning equipment,
etc., resulting from failure to comply with the above requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Plumbing Systems Start Up SECTION 15040
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 W ORK INCLUDED ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 2
1.5 DEFECTS AND LIABILITY PERIOD ................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS ....................................................... 3
2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION .......................................................................................................... 3
2.3 STARTUP .................................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................................................................... 4
2.5 OPERATION AND TESTING ............................................................................................................ 4
2.6 DEMONSTRATION ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................................................... 5
2.8 RECORD DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................... 5
2.9 COMPLETION .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.10 SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................................. 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 6
3.1 COMMISSIONING TESTS ............................................................................................................... 6
3.2 POST SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE VISITS ................................................................................... 6
3.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 7
3.4 STATUTORY AUTHORITIES’ TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ..................................................................... 7

Plumbing System Start Up.doc
SECTION 15040
PLUMBING SYSTEMS START UP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified

in this Sections and other sections referenced. These include, but are not limited to,
commissioning, enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual,
and detailed training of the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Comply with the Agreement between the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE and

Trade GENERAL CONTRACTOR and all other documents referred to therein.
B. Provide all services, materials and labour required to fully start up the plumbing
system in accordance with this Section of the Specification.
C. On completion of the work, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall start up the entire
installation and put it into operation in accordance with the intent of this Specification.
D. After start up and prior to ‘Practical Completion’, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
provide all necessary facilities and instruments to satisfy the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE that the installation meets the requirements of the Specification,
and when so satisfied the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall issue a Certificate
of Practical Completion. Within 7 days after the system test has been carried out, the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall submit six copies of test and inspection reports to
the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for distribution. See additional test and
reporting requirements in Section 17100, Commissioning.
E. Each set of reports shall comprise the following:
1. A report on items tested and inspected during erection and before system
start-up.
2. Reports on the tests of fire services installation conducted in the presence of
the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
3. Test certificates issued by local authorities, etc., as available.
4. See additional requirements in Section 17100, Commissioning
F. Two month prior to the inspection and tests, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
propose the testing procedure and details as well as the relevant report forms to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE for approval.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Meet the requirements of the General Instructions.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all other Divisions to ensure complete and
operational plumbing systems at completion of this work.
C. Appoint a single person as COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY who shall be responsible

for progressing the start up activities of each Division 15 trade.
D. Review the design intent of the project and the intended operation of systems with the

MEEPF CONSULTANT before proceeding with start up.
A. Division may elect to source start-up and handover by a specialist start up company.
Supply to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, the following details regarding the
proposed firm:
1. Principal representative and qualifications

2. Proposed personnel and relevant project experience
3. Previous similar assignments and references
4. Scope of work to be undertaken
5. Company resources and equipment
B. Use of a start up specialist shall not relieve Division 15 of the obligation to name one
of his own employees as the person responsible for progressing commissioning, i.e.
the COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY.
C. Supply the name, qualifications and experience of the proposed start up Coordinator
upon EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE request. Selection shall be subject to
review and the approval of the MEEPF CONSULTANT. Supply alternative person(s)
when requested by MEEPF CONSULTANT.
D. The MEEPF CONSULTANT may, at his discretion, attend and advise in the start up
process. Meet MEEPF CONSULTANT requirements.
E. Hold and attend regular meetings during the start up process. Prepare detailed
progress reports to coincide with regular start up meetings. Coordinate with the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE, the preparation and issue of minutes for each
meeting to be circulated to each involved trade, the MEEPF CONSULTANT and the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Minutes shall highlight action items.
1.5 DEFECTS AND LIABILITY PERIOD
A. The Defects and Liability Period will commence from the date of Practical Completion.
Immediately after the Practical Completion, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
supply all labor to run the plant for a period of 4 weeks. The GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for providing adequate training of two (2)
plant attendants for a duration of not less than two week. During the Defects Liability
Period, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall carry out regular preventive maintenance
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of equipment installed
under this Specification, or otherwise as directed, and shall provide a fast, efficient
and comprehensive breakdown service.
B. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall renew the F.S. certificate for the EMPLOYER
upon completion of the Defects Liability Period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULES AND COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS
A. Submit to the MEEPF CONSULTANT, 60 days prior to the scheduled Substantial

Performance, a detailed and comprehensive installation completion/start-up/testing
schedule, identifying all trades and suppliers to be involved. Update the schedule and
resubmit for review, on a biweekly basis, during the course of commissioning. If
found to be unacceptable, revise the schedule and the construction forces to suit the
reviewed schedule. This schedule shall include, but is not limited to the following
items:
1. Installation and testing of pipe systems
2. Chemical clean out and treatment of pipe systems, including disinfection of

domestic water piping
3. Electrical service connections (by Electrical GENERAL CONTRACTOR)
4. Start up of various pieces of equipment and systems
5. Operational testing of system components
6. Performance testing of equipment and systems
7. Acceptance testing of equipment installations and system, by authorities
having jurisdiction and EMPLOYER’S insurance company.
8. Troubleshooting
9. Submittal of completed equipment and system checkout sheets
10. Demonstration of systems and equipment
11. Maintenance manual preparation and submittal
12. Operator training program
13. Record documentation submittal.
14. See additional requirements in Section 17100, Commissioning.
2.2 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Prepare record documentation for each equipment installation covering:
1. Equipment identification and supplier;

2. Shop Drawing submittal, review, production release, and delivery dates;
3. Dates for completion of all work required to prepare for equipment installation;
4. Dates for equipment installation, supplier pre-start checkout and system
availability for start-up;
5. Dates for equipment start-up, performance testing, proposal for temporary
use, acceptance testing, demonstration, turnover and warranty start/finish.
B. Submit proposed record sheets and procedures to MEEPF CONSULTANT for review,
when requested by the EMPLOYER.
C. List all specialist personnel and equipment required for the test and ensure that these
are available by the test date.
D. Provide documentation of the start up process for inclusion into the maintenance
manuals. These are to include checkout sheets, equipment data sheets, start-up
certificates from suppliers involved in start-up, documentation concerning
demonstration to the EMPLOYER. Include all record and result sheets formstart up
tests.
E. Maintain a log of key operating parameters, problems encountered, solutions

employed and verification of effectiveness of solutions. Include log in maintenance
manuals.

F. Refer to example documentation available from Section 17100 and related Division
sections. Meet or exceed this level of reporting.
2.3 STARTUP
A. Coordinate and supervise the startup of the various pieces of equipment and systems.
Utilize the startup services of the manufacturer's representative. Ensure that the
equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner. Check the following items:
1. Direction of rotation.
2. Noise, if deemed to be a problem
3. Piping connections and safeties
4. Electrical amp draw, starting inrush current and trip/heater settings
B. Meet Section 15010 requirements for Temporary Services and Temporary and Trial
Use.
C. See additional requirements in Section 17100, Commissioning.
2.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
A. Resolve inter Division coordination problems.
B. Where problems become apparent during the commissioning process, identify and
resolve these problems. The basic functions in troubleshooting are:
1. What - identification and definition of the problem

2. Why - determination and evaluation of the causes
3. When - determine the time available to resolve the problem
4. Involve the designing authority in the review of the problem and proposed
resolution
5. Coordinate remedial action with the appropriate parties
6. Evaluate the effectiveness of the remedial action
7. Record the problem, cause, remedial action and result
2.5 OPERATION AND TESTING
A. Meet Section 15010 requirements for Inspection, Testing and Certificates.
B. Test the operation of the individual components and systems. Go through each step
of the sequence of operation and verify that each component operates correctly.
Direct and ensure that all trades involved make the required changes and
adjustments to effect the proper operation of all components and systems. Meet
commissioning test requirements.
C. Document operation and testing.
D. Carry out operational tests for the current season and simulate operation during peak
hour.
2.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate to the EMPLOYER the proper operation of all equipment and systems
supplied under this Division. Demonstrations shall occur only after the operation and
testing has been successfully completed. Ensure that Trade GENERAL
CONTRACTOR and equipment suppliers participate in the demonstration as required.
B. Meet Section 15010 requirements for Instruction to EMPLOYERS.

C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train EMPLOYER’S

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Plumbing equipment,
instrumentation and controls.
2.7 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Meet Section 15010 requirements.
B. Coordinate the manual provision with MEEPF CONSULTANT prepared Operation and
Maintenance Manual, if available.
2.8 RECORD DRAWINGS
2.9 COMPLETION
2.10 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide a list of spare parts, special tools, etc. for each item of equipment which has
been purchased as part of the Contract.
B. Provide a listing of recommended spare parts for all equipment installed under
Division 15, to cover a period from Substantial Completion to Warranty end.
C. Provide at minimum, the following information for recommended spare parts:
1. Manufacturer's name, address, phone and fax numbers

2. Manufacturer's part name, part number, unit price, lead time, shelf life
3. Quantity recommended for 1 year
4. Alternative suppliers of compatible parts, including local supplier name,
address, phone and fax numbers
C. Submit preliminary list of spare parts and tools to EMPLOYER at least 30 days prior to
intended system handover to EMPLOYER. The EMPLOYER reserves the right to add
to, reduce or omit entirely, the recommendations contained on these lists.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TESTS
Plumbing System
A. Verify readings, calibration and set-up of sensors and equipment, including:
1. Water pressure sensors

2. Status switches
3. Pressure gauges and gauge connection utilization
4. Alarm contacts
B. Verify correct sensors are reporting accurately to the distributed field panels and
operator workstation.
C. Operate each pump unit. Verify and correct the following if required:
1. Start/stop from the terminal

2. Correct open/close and modulation procedures with valves
3. Stable operation of controls under normal conditions and with changes in
electrode level/on/off conditions
4. Piping, sensor and unit installation
D. Verify systems pipe cleaning and chemical treatment condition for all systems.
E. Verify access to all valves, equipment and components for servicing.
Other Services:
A. Coordinate with Division 16, a power failure test with emergency generator start-up.
1. Miscellaneous equipment on emergency power, with Division 16.

2. Stability of control equipment with start-up power surge
3. Controls system recovery
B. Verify the operation of all other equipment provided by Division 15.
C. Verify that interfacing to the work of other Divisions results in complete and
operational systems.
3.2 POST SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE VISITS
A. Visit the site and the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE each month after Substantial
Performance for a minimum period of two days until the end of the project warranty
period.
B. Review the operation of the system.
C. Correct any operating problems, if problem is related to warranty issues.
D. Prepare a report for the MEEPF CONSULTANT and EMPLOYER’S

REPRESENTATIVE for inclusion in the Operating Manuals of the problems and
issues that have arisen and the corrective action(s) recommended and implement.
E. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall undertake to provide a comprehensive

breakdown service whereby a qualified electrician or plumber attends to breakdowns
as soon as practicable after a breakdown is reported and carries out immediate
remedial work.

F. Where the GENERAL CONTRACTOR fails to attend the plant, within four (4) normal
working hours of notification of a breakdown and where remedial work is interrupted
during normal working hours for purposes other than obtaining replacement parts
from the nearest source, the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE reserves the right to
order such action as may reasonably expedite completion of remedial work at the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR expense without abrogation of the GENERAL
CONTRACTOR responsibilities.
3.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
A. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall carry out regular inspections at periods not
exceeding one calendar month, and shall fully service all plant installed under this
Specification within the Defects Liability Period, and shall maintain all such plant in
perfect operation during the period.
At each maintenance visit, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
1. carry out all lubrication necessary;

2. check and adjust as necessary all drives;
3. check all bearings for correction operation;
4. check all anti-vibration supports for deterioration;
5. check all connection for tightness;
6. check all sump and drains, and cleans as necessary;
7. prove correct operation of all safety controls;
8. prove operation of all automatic controls; and
9. check all glands, packings, etc. and adjust or replace as necessary.
In addition to the monthly maintenance schedule, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall

at intervals not exceeding six months:
1. clean and re-grease all bearings as necessary;

2. inspect and clean as necessary all items of plant and equipment;
3. clean and adjust all switchgear, contactors and starters; and
4. prove operation of all thermal overloads
3.4 STATUTORY AUTHORITIES’ TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall attend all tests and inspections carried out by
statutory authorities, and shall forthwith execute any variation work as a result of his
failure to comply with the statutory requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Common Work Results for Plumbing SECTION 15052
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY.................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................................. 2
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.......................................................................................... 2
1.7 COORDINATION .......................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS ......................................................................................................... 3
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 3
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS................................................................................................................. 4
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS.................................................................................................................. 5
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS ...................................................................................................... 6
2.7 SLEEVES ................................................................................................................................... 6
2.8 ESCUTCHEONS .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.9 GROUT ...................................................................................................................................... 7
PART 3 – EXECUTION........................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION .............................................................................................................. 8
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................. 8
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION ................................................................................................... 10
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................. 12
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION – COMMON REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 12
3.6 PAINTING ................................................................................................................................. 12
3.7 CONCRETE BASES ................................................................................................................... 12
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES ................................................................. 13
3.9 ERECTION OF W OOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES ................................................................. 13
3.10 GROUNTING............................................................................................................................. 13

Common Work Result for Plumbing.doc
SECTION 15052
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 – GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Sleeves.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Grout.
8. Plumbing demolition.
9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
10. Painting and finishing.
11. Concrete bases.
12. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
5. PPR: Polypropylene Random

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding Certificates.
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance
of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-

place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are
specified in Architectural Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and

Supplier”.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum

thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise
indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for
refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

Supplier”.
2. Coordinate first subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below with

Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and
delete for semiproprietary specifications.
3. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or
coupling.
4. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-
type coupling.
5. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-
joint end.

Supplier”.
2. Coordinate subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below with Part 2

"Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and delete for
semiproprietary specifications.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-
joint end.

Supplier”.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union.
Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

Supplier”.


E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:

ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

Supplier”.
2. Coordinate below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for

nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa)

minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

Supplier”.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-

psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.

Supplier”.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include

flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene
bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

Supplier”.
2. Coordinate first subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below with

Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for nonproprietary and
delete for semiproprietary specifications.
3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-
psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit
system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working
pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).


Supplier”.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive,

thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa)
minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

Supplier”.
2. Coordinate below with Part 2 "Manufacturers" Article. Retain "Available" for

nonproprietary and delete for semiproprietary specifications.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one
for each sealing element.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished

chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated or Rough brass.
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, set screw or

spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.9 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for
general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components

indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed

and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with
same or compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services
and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to EMPLOYER.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new
products of equal capacity and quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections

specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.
Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-
piece, stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or
split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed
hinge and set screw.
h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel
type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring
clips.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type
with set screw or spring clips.
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece,
floor-plate type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete
floor and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical

equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished
floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as
required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following
sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger,
penetrating gypsum-board partitions.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm)
above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth,
and location of joint. Refer to Architectural Section "Joint Sealants" for
materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to
allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause
sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer
to Section 15480 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove
burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants
on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and
PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-
number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to
ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join
according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve
and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged
valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting

heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Sections

15010 “General Provisions”.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.7 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around
the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.

7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and

reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed
to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.10 GROUNTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment
SECTION 15057
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 COORDINATION ........................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................... 1
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................................... 1
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTOTS ................................................................................................................... 2
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS W ITH ADDITIONAL RQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 2
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS ............................................................................................................. 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) ........................................................................................ 3

Common Motor Requirements.doc
SECTION 15057
SECTION 15057
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems
up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by
equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with
the following:
1. Motor controllers.
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
(1000 m) above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

SECTION 15057
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding, squirrel cage.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal
box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed

and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses
produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, 1.15 minimum service factor.

SECTION 15057
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
D. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split phase.
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
E. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
F. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
G. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
H. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature
returns to normal range.
PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
SECTION 15061
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................. 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE.................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ....................................................................................... 2
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS............................................................................................................. 3
2.3 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS ........................................................................................................ 3
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................... 3
2.5 FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................... 4
2.6 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS ............................................................................................ 4
2.7 FASTENER SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................... 4
2.8 PIPE STANDS .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.9 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................... 5
2.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................... 5
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 5
PART 3 – EXECUTION .......................................................................................................................... 6
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 6
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................... 8
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS ................................................................................................................. 8
3.4 ADJUSTING ................................................................................................................................. 8
3.5 PAINTING .................................................................................................................................... 8
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE ............................................................................................. 9

Hangers & Supports for Plumbing Piping & Equipment.doc
SECTION 15061
SECTION 15061
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.
3. Fiberglass pipe hangers.
4. Metal framing systems.
5. Fiberglass strut systems.
6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
7. Fastener systems.
8. Pipe stands.
9. Pipe positioning systems.
10. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates

for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
2. Division 13 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-
suppression piping.
3. Division 15 Section 15073 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment
shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of

supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test
water.
2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight
of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and
obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

SECTION 15061
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show

fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include
Product Data for components:
1. Trapeze pipe hangers.

2. Metal framing systems.
3. Fiberglass strut systems.
4. Pipe stands.
5. Equipment supports.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.
D. Welding certificates.
A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according

to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or
cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon
steel.
B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or
cushion to support bearing surface of piping.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless
steel.
C. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-

fabricated components.

SECTION 15061
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-

coated steel.
2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly

made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods,
nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
2.3 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS
A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger
is made of fiberglass or fiberglass-reinforced resin.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of fiberglass or
stainless steel.
B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 9 or Type 10, steel pipe hanger
except hanger is made of fiberglass-reinforced resin.
2. Hanger Rod and Fittings: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of
stainless steel.
2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and

Supplier.
2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting
multiple parallel pipes.
3. Standard: MFMA-4.
4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit
into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon
steel.
7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.
8. Paint Coating: Epoxy.
9. Plastic Coating: Epoxy.
B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and

Supplier.
2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel
channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple
parallel pipes.
3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.
4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit
into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel
or stainless steel.
7. Coating: Paint.

SECTION 15061
2.5 FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier.
B. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly similar to MFMA-4 for

supporting multiple parallel pipes.
1. Channels: Continuous slotted fibreglass [or other plastic] channel with inturned
lips.
2. Channel Nuts: Fiberglass nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel
slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of fibreglass or
stainless steel.
2.6 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with
100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig
(862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533,

Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass
with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with
125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.
D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference
of pipe.
E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping
operating below ambient air temperature.
2.7 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for

use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.8 PIPE STANDS
A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or
V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.

SECTION 15061
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:
1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe

support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Base: Plastic or Stainless steel.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,
continuous-thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic
or stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:
1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe

supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Bases: One or more; plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from

structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on
permanent stationary roof curb.
2.9 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps
for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
2.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from

structural carbon-steel shapes.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS M ATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black
and galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,
nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

SECTION 15061
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from the building structure.
B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on
field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest
pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as
specified for individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69

and MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support
piping from building structure.
D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping,
and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping,
and support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated

piping.
G. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed
and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated
tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual.
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
H. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and

mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe
stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 7 Section
"Roof Accessories" for curbs.
I. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and
waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 15 plumbing fixture
Sections for requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.
J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts,
rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
K. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

SECTION 15061
L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to
facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar
units.
M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars
through openings at top of inserts.
O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads
and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not
exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
Q. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor
barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is
installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and
0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)
thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and
5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-
silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.

SECTION 15061
3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface
smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc
welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding
work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and

to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
mm).
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for
shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted
surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
mils (0.05 mm).
B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9
painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15061
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal
framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and fiberglass pipe hangers and fiberglass strut
systems and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile
environment applications.
G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper
piping and tubing.
H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of

noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to
DN 750).
2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F
(566 deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4
inches (100 mm) of insulation.
3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For
suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp
flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes
NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.
5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4
(DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before
pipe erection.
6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension
of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).
7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).
10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to
DN 200).

SECTION 15061
11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For
suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to
DN 80).
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15
to DN 750).
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion
or contraction.
14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36
(DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor
flange or carbon-steel plate.
15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to
NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-
iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support
for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is
required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30
(DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2
to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused
by expansion and contraction might occur.
19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42
(DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to
NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion
and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes
NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during
installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser
clamps.
L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for
heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping
installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232
deg C) piping installations.
M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


SECTION 15061
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching
to structural steel.
12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).
13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids

with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll
hanger with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping
system from base support.

SECTION 15061
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping
system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer
of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-
adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.
S. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support
supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
SECTION 15073
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 4

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS ............................................................................................................... 4
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES .................................................................................... 6
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES ..................................................................................................... 7
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES .................................................................................................................... 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 8

3.1 EXAMINATION............................................................................................................................. 8
3.2 APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION............................................ 9
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION ................................................................. 10
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 10
3.6 ADJUSTING .............................................................................................................................. 10

Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping & Equipment.doc
SECTION 15073
SECTION 15073
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in this
Sections and other sections referenced. These include, but are not limited to,
commissioning, enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and
detailed training of the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads.
2. Isolation mounts.
3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.
5. Housed spring mounts.
6. Elastomeric hangers.
7. Spring hangers.
8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
9. Pipe riser resilient supports.
10. Resilient pipe guides.
11. Seismic snubbers.
12. Restraining braces and cables.
13. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.
A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: refer to Structural

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: refer to
Structural.
a. Component Importance Factor: refer to Structural

b. Component Response Modification Factor: refer to Structural
c. Component Amplification Factor: refer to Structural
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): refer to

Structural

SECTION 15073
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: refer to Structural
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers
and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional MEEPF CONSULTANT responsible for their
preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight
and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints,
and for designing vibration isolation bases.
2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated
expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building
structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser
system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component
misalignment, and cantilever loads.
4. Seismic-Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints
to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations,
methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate
directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic
events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and
the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and
equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and
seismic restraints.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Qualification Data: For professional MEEPF CONSULTANT and testing agency.
F. Field quality-control test reports.

SECTION 15073
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability
to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section
are more stringent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or
preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing
maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to
ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on
independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile
loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified
professional MEEPF CONSULTANT.
E. Noise Criteria
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not
exceed following NC levels:
TYPE OF ROOM NC LEVEL

Audio Speech Pathology 25
Audio Suites 25
Auditoriums, Theaters 35
Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms 40
Chapels 35
Conference Rooms 35
Corridors (Nurse Stations) 40
Corridors(Public) 40
Dining Rooms, Food Services/ Serving 35
Examination Rooms 35
Gymnasiums 50
Kitchens 50
Laboratories 45
Laundries 50
Lobbies, Waiting Areas 40
Locker Rooms 50
Offices, large open 40
Offices, small private 35
Operating Rooms 40
Patient Rooms 35
Phono/Cardiology 25
Recreation Rooms 50
Shops 50
SPD 35
Therapeutic Pools 45
Treatment Rooms 35

SECTION 15073
Warehouse 50
X-Ray & general Work Rooms 40
2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans,
the contractor shall select equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria,
local ordinance noise levels, and OSHA requirements are not exceeded.
Selection procedure shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals
Handbook 2001, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.
3. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to

compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room
test condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which
may include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This
allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is
defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and
sound pressure level in room.
4. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment
noise levels three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise
generation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier”.
B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over
pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to
sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene or rubber.
C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top
plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or
otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal
operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for
bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal
operation.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for
bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

SECTION 15073
E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor
load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).
6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap
screw to fasten and level equipment.
F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-
stop restraint.
1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick,
neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable
equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having
jurisdiction.
G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.
1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.
3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or
down before contacting a resilient collar.
H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for
hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and
insert in compression.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-
reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.

SECTION 15073
J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert

hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or
reducing isolation efficiency.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and
support spring coil.
K. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel
tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and
neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design
support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal
resistance in all directions.
L. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve
arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where
clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical
motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable
and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion
to meet location requirements.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
B. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers
and products. Retain one of first three paragraphs and list of manufacturers below. See
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

SECTION 15073
D. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for
placement of cast-in-place concrete.
1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary
motor slide bases or rails.
a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and
anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from
supported equipment manufacturer.
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and

applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they
will be subjected.
C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,
and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge
or female-wedge type.
2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
3. Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient
cushion.
D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of

slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and
to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-
resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type
and size of attachment devices used.

SECTION 15073
I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated

steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum
length of eight times diameter.
K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or
urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar
adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications
and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for
anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
2.4 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior
use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to
indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for
application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on
Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to
seismic forces.
C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic
loads within specified loading limits.

SECTION 15073
3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators.

Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment
base and supporting structure.
2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches (3.2 mm).
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction] providing required submittals for component.
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a
maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to
wall.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure

at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes
for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT if reinforcing steel or other
embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed
tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-
duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural
element to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the
hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of
air pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior
applications.

SECTION 15073
3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent
sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the
connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural
element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply
with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible
connections.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Schedule test with Owner, through ARCHITECT, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved),
and with at least seven days' advance notice.
3. Obtain ARCHITECT’S approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
ARCHITECT/MEEPF CONSULTANT.
5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.
7. Measure isolator deflection.
8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.
9. Air-Mounting System Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
10. Air-Mounting System Operational Test: Test the compressed-air leveling system.
11. Test and adjust air-mounting system controls and safeties.
12. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating
height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact
during normal operation.
C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.
D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
SECTION 15076
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS............................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................................... 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 W ARNING SIGNS AND LABELS .................................................................................................... 3
2.3 PIPE LABELS ............................................................................................................................. 3
2.4 STENCILS .................................................................................................................................. 3
2.5 VALVE TAGS.............................................................................................................................. 4
2.6 W ARNING TAGS......................................................................................................................... 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................ 4
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION........................................................................................................... 4
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 5
3.5 W ARNING-TAG INSTALLATION..................................................................................................... 5

Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.DOC
SECTION 15076
SECTION 15076
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Sections and other sections referenced. These include, but are not limited to,
commissioning, enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and
detailed training of the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Equipment labels.
2. Warning signs and labels.
3. Pipe labels.
4. Stencils.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
D. Valve numbering scheme.
E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

SECTION 15076
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Metal Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) or anodized

aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment
hardware.
2. Letter Color: Black
3. Background Color: White
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less
than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches
(1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include
secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws
8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate.
C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.

SECTION 15076
2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B. Letter Color: Black
C. Background Color: White.
D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).
E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-
1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).
F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and
proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering
two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws
H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS
A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
2.4 STENCILS
A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter
height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar
operational instructions.
1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint
may be in pressurized spray-can form.
3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1
unless otherwise indicated.

SECTION 15076
2.5 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system
abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.
1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch

(0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware.
2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
2.6 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized

card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: Approximately 4 by 8 inches (100 by 200 mm).

2. Fasteners: Reinforced grommet and wire or string.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 15 Section 15076

“Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”.
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured
pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands
or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.
1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

SECTION 15076
C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to
25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1. Domestic Water Piping:
a. Background Color: refer to Schedule

b. Letter Color: Black
2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:
a. Background Color: refer to Schedule.

b. Letter Color: Black
3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-
watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and
units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme
and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 50mm, square
2. Valve-Tag Color: Refer to Schedule
3. Letter Color: Refer to Schedule
3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Refer to Section 17100 "Commissioning” for commissioning requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping SECTION 15111
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGEM AND HANDLING ......................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES ....................................................................................... 3
2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES .............................................................................................................. 3
2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES ................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES ................................................................................................................ 7
2.5 IRON BALL VALVES ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.6 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES .................................................................................. 9
2.7 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES .................................................................................11
2.8 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES.....................................................................................................11
2.9 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES .................................................................................................12
2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES......................................................................................................13
2.11 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL................................................................14
2.12 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES..............................................................................14
2.13 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES ......................................................................................14
2.14 IRON, PLATE-TYPE CHECK VALVES ............................................................................................18
2.15 BRONZE GATE VALVES..............................................................................................................20
2.16 IRON GATE VALVES ..................................................................................................................21
2.17 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES............................................................................................................22
2.18 IRON GLOBE VALVES ................................................................................................................23
2.19 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES .......................................................................................................23
2.20 CHAINWHEELS .........................................................................................................................25
PART 3 - EXECUTION .........................................................................................................................26

3.1 EXAMINATION...........................................................................................................................26
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................26
3.3 ADJUSTING ..............................................................................................................................26
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS .................................................................26
3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT AND COLD WATER VALVE SCHEDULE .................................................................27
3.6 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE........................................................27

General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.DOC
SECTION 15111
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Brass ball valves.
3. Bronze ball valves.
4. Iron ball valves.
5. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.
6. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves.
7. Bronze lift check valves.
8. Bronze swing check valves.
9. Iron swing check valves.
10. Iron swing check valves with closure control.
11. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves.
12. Iron, center-guided check valves.
13. Iron, plate-type check valves.
14. Bronze gate valves.
15. Iron gate valves.
16. Bronze globe valves.
17. Iron globe valves.
18. Lubricated plug valves.
19. Chainwheels.
1. Division 2 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for
site construction piping.
2. Division 15 Section 15140, 15150, 15160 plumbing piping Sections for specialty
valves applicable to those Sections only.
3. Division 15 Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
valve tags and schedules.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Nonrising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.
2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller except plug valves.
4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish EMPLOYER with 1 wrench for
every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.
5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of
size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.
E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:
1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
F. Valve-End Connections:
1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier”.
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.
f. Packing: Asbestos free.
g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

B. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier”.
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
C. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
d. Ends: Threaded.
D. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
2. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming
manufacturers. See Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
3. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier”
Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110.


c. Body Design: One piece.

d. Body Material: Forged brass.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
g. Stem: Brass.
h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i. Port: Reduced.
B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
2. Description:

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).
d. Body Design: Two piece.
e. Body Material: Forged brass.
f. Ends: Threaded.
g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
h. Stem: Brass.
i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
j. Port: Full.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Stainless steel.
i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
j. Port: Full.
D. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Brass.
j. Port: Regular.

E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:

e. Body Material: Brass or bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Regular.
F. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
2. Description:

d. Body Design: Three piece.
f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Brass.
j. Port: Full.
G. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
2. Description:

d. Body Material: Bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
g. Stem: Bronze.
h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i. Port: Reduced.
B. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:

d. Body Material: Bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
i. Port: Reduced.
C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
2. Description:

e. Body Material: Bronze.
f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Bronze.
j. Port: Full.
D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:


f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Full.
E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Bronze.
j. Port: Regular.
F. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Regular.
G. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
h. Stem: Bronze.

j. Port: Full.
H. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:
2. Description:

f. Ends: Threaded.
j. Port: Full.
2.5 IRON BALL VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Split body.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
e. Ends: Flanged.
g. Stem: Stainless steel.
h. Ball: Stainless steel.
i. Port: Full.
2.6 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.

c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e. Seat: EPDM.
f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

2. Description:

e. Seat: NBR.
g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.
C. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:
2. Description:

e. Seat: EPDM.
g. Disc: Nickel-plated or coated ductile iron.
D. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:
2. on:

e. Seat: NBR.
g. Disc: Nickel-plated or coated ductile iron.
E. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:
2. Description:

e. Seat: EPDM.
g. Disc: Stainless steel.

F. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:
2. Description:

e. Seat: NBR.
g. Disc: Stainless steel.
2.7 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:
2. Description:

c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.
d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.
e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron.
B. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:
2. Description:

b. NPS 8 (DN 200) and Smaller CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
c. NPS 10 (DN 250) and Larger CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
d. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.
e. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.
f. Disc: Coated, ductile iron.
g. Seal: EPDM.
2.8 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Vertical flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Vertical flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE.
2.9 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.
B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Threaded.
C. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Threaded.
f. Disc: Bronze.

D. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Threaded.
2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
g. Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Composition.
g. Seat Ring: Bronze.
h. Disc Holder: Bronze.
i. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
j. Gasket: Asbestos free.
C. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.

2.11 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL
A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.
B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Weight-Closure Control:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Trim: Bronze.
h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and weight.
2.12 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES
A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves:
2. Description:
a. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).

b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
c. Seal: EPDM.
d. Disc: Spring-operated, ductile iron or stainless steel.
2.13 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron.
d. Style: Compact wafer.
e. Seat: Bronze.

B. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

d. Style: Globe, spring loaded.
e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: Bronze.
C. Class 150, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM A 395/A 395M or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e. Seat: Bronze.
D. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: Bronze.
E. Class 250, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

d. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded.
e. Seat: Bronze.
F. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:



e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: Bronze.
G. Class 300, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

e. Seat: Bronze.
H. Class 300, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: Bronze.
I. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

e. Seat: EPDM or NBR
J. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
f. Seat: EPDM or NBR

K. Class 150, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

L. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
M. Class 250, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

N. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
O. Class 300, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:



P. Class 300, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

e. Ends: Flanged.
2.14 IRON, PLATE-TYPE CHECK VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:
a. Standard: API 594.

c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates.
e. Seat: Bronze.
B. Class 150, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

d. Body Material: ASTM A 395/A 395M or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e. Seat: Bronze.
C. Class 250, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

e. Seat: Bronze.

D. Class 300, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat:
2. Description:

e. Seat: Bronze.
E. Class 125, Iron, Single-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate.
F. Class 125, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

G. Class 150, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

H. Class 250, Iron, Wafer, Single-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate.

I. Class 250, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

J. Class 300, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:
2. Description:

2.15 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.
e. Stem: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:
2. Description:

e. Stem: Bronze.

C. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
D. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
2.16 IRON GATE VALVES
A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Disc: Solid wedge.
g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.

C. Class 250, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
D. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
2.17 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint
B. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
2. Description:

e. Stem: Bronze.

C. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Threaded.
e. Stem: Bronze.
2.18 IRON GLOBE VALVES
A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:
2. Description:

d. Ends: Flanged.
e. Trim: Bronze.
f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
2.19 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES
A. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II.

c. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-
sealing system.
d. Pattern: Regular or short Venturi
e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

B. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:
2. Description:

sealing system.
C. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.

sealing system.
D. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:
2. Description:

sealing system.
E. Class 250, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:
2. Description:

sealing system.
F. Class 250, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:
2. Description:


sealing system.
G. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:
2. Description:

sealing system.
d. Pattern: Regular or short Venturi Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant
groove.
H. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:
2. Description:

c. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, Grade 40 cast iron with
lubrication-sealing system.
2.20 CHAINWHEELS
B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.
1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.
2. Attachment: For connection to ball butterfly and plug valve stems.
3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron Ductile or cast iron Cast iron Aluminum
Bronze, of type and size required for valve. Include zinc coating.
4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel Brass Stainless steel, of size required to fit sprocket
rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install chainwheels on operators butterfly or gate and plug valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and
larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520
mm) above finished floor.
F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position,
between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.
3. Throttling Service: Globe or angle or ball valves.
4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze non-slam check valves with bronze or
nonmetallic disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron non-slam check
valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or
resilient-seat check valves.
c. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron
swing check valves with lever and weight or spring.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where
solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except
where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends.
5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except
where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.
6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.
7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.
3.5 DOMESTIC COLD WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of
threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two Three piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.
4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic disc.
5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125 NRS
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded
ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, ductile-iron disc.
4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 300 CWP.
5. Iron Non-Slam Check Valves: Class 250, nonmetallic-to-metal seats.
6. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.
7. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
8. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 250 or Class 300, compact-wafer resilient
seat.
9. Iron, Plate-Type Check Valves: Class 250 or Class 300; dual plate; resilient seat.
10. Iron Gate Valves: Class 300, OS&Y.
11. Iron Globe Valves: Class 300.
3.6 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of
threaded ends.
2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic or stainless-steel disc.
3. Ball Valves: Two or Three piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim.

4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic disc.

5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125
6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125 nonmetallic disc.
B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded
ends instead of flanged ends.
2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150.
3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 [nonmetallic-to-metal seats.
4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and weight.
5. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.
6. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS
7. Iron Globe Valves: [Class 125] [Class 250].
8. Lubricated Plug Valves: Class 125 regular gland flanged.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Domestic Water Piping SECTION 15140
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 1
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................... 2
1.6 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 PPR PIPING & FITTINGS ............................................................................................................ 3
2.3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE & FITTINGS ................................................................................. 3
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL PIPING & FITTINGS ......................................................................................... 3
2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 3
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING .......................................................................................................... 4
2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS ................................................................................................................ 4
2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS ................................................................................................................ 4
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS............................................................................................................. 6
2.10 W ATER METERS ........................................................................................................................ 6
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS .......................................................................................................................... 7
2.12 SLEEVES ................................................................................................................................... 7
2.13 SLEEVE SEALS .......................................................................................................................... 8
2.14 W ALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS ................................................................................................... 8
2.15 GROUT ..................................................................................................................................... 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 EARTHWORK ............................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION................................................................................................................. 9
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................................10
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................................11
3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................11
3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION...........................................................................................12
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION .......................................................................................12
3.8 W ATER METER INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................12
3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................12
3.10 CONNECTIONS.........................................................................................................................14
3.11 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................14
3.12 SLEEVE INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................15
3.13 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................16
3.14 W ALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION .............................................................................16
3.15 IDENTIFICATION .......................................................................................................................16
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.........................................................................................................17
3.17 ADJUSTING..............................................................................................................................17
3.18 CLEANING ...............................................................................................................................18
3.19 PIPING SCHEDULE ...................................................................................................................18
3.20 VALVE SCHEDULE....................................................................................................................19
3.21 DEMONSTRATION.....................................................................................................................19

Domestic Water Piping.DOC
SECTION 15140
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
and other sections referenced. These include, but are not limited to, commissioning,
enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of
the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and
specialties inside the building.
2. Encasement for piping.
3. Flexible connectors.
4. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by GENERAL
CONTRACTOR.
5. Water meters.
6. Escutcheons.
7. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
8. Wall penetration systems.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water-service piping and water meters
outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the
building.
Revise this article to indicate specific loads determined by STRUCTURAL CONSULTANT or

see loads indicated on Drawings. Model building codes and ASCE/SEI 7 establish criteria
for buildings subject to earthquake motions. Verify requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
a. Main Riser Pipework 80 psi
b. Distribution system (Booster) 25 psi

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following products:
1. Specialty valves.
4. Flexible connectors.
5. Water meters.
6. Backflow preventers, Vacuum breakers, Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers.
7. Escutcheons.
8. Sleeves and sleeve seals.
9. Water penetration systems.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including
printed statement of VOC content.
C. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
D. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn
to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using
input from Installers of the items involved:
1. Fire-suppression-water piping.
2. Domestic water piping.
3. Compressed air piping.
4. HVAC hydronic piping.
E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied
by EMPLOYER or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE no fewer than two (2) days in advance of

proposed interruption of water service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 PPR PIPING & FITTINGS
A. Polypropylene Pipes (PPR) PN-20 with Fusion Joint Connections DIN 16968/DIN16969.
1. Connection to each fixture – compression joint fittings

2. Horizontal Suspended piping – Socket fusion join and fittings.
3. Riser (including main branch out) – Electrofusion joint and fittings
2.3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE & FITTINGS
A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes, Fittings & Valves. DIN 8074/DIN8075, jointing
shall be as follows:
1. Pipes sizes 150mm and larger – Butt fusion joint and fittings (including discharge to
equipment/tank).
2. Connection to pump – Flange adapter.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL PIPING & FITTINGS
A. Stainless Steel Pipes & Fittings, Seamless Pipes Grade 304 & 316 ASTM 167, 240, 666
1. Suction connection to pump.
2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring
type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
1. Use CPVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
ASTM F 656.
1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B. Form: Tube.
C. Material: [LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness or high-density, cross-

laminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.
D. Color: Natural
2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.
C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
2. Description: CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-
socket or threaded end.
E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
2. Description: CPVC or PVC four-part union. Include brass[ or stainless-steel

threaded end, solvent-cement-joint[ or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union
nut.
2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material
body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure,
and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:

2. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F (82
deg C).
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
2. Description:
a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

b. Pressure Rating: System: 150 psig (1035 kPa)] minimum 300 psig (2070 kPa).
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded
solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
2. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings:
2. Description:
a. Galvanized-steel coupling.
b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
c. End Connections: Female threaded.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic.
F. Dielectric Nipples:
2. Description:
a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid

covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa).

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end
copper tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-

steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa)

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
2.10 WATER METERS
A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:
2. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C700.

b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure.
c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by
utility.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections: Threaded.
B. Turbine-Type Water Meters:
C.
2. Description:

c. Body Design: Turbine; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility
company.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. End Connections for Meters NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
g. End Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Compound-Type Water Meters:
2. Description:


c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter.
d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility
company.
e. Case: Bronze.
f. Pipe Connections: Flanged.
E. Remote Registration System: Direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706; modified
with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register
assembly as required by utility company.
F. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with AWWA C707; modified with
signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly
as required by utility company.
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated or rough-brass finish with setscrews.
C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.
D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with [setscrew] [or] [spring clips].
E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated or rough-brass finish with concealed
hinge and setscrew.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with exposed-rivet hinge, or spring clips.
G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
2.12 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.
C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-
coated, with plain ends.
G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.13 SLEEVE SEALS
B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.
2.14 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following or available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. SIGMA.
B. Description: Wall-sleeve assembly, consisting of housing and gland, gaskets, and pipe
sleeve.
1. Carrier-Pipe Deflection: Up to 5 percent without leakage.

2. Housing: Ductile-iron casting with hub, waterstop, anchor ring, and locking devices.
Include gland, bolts, and nuts.
3. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: EPDM rubber
4. Housing-to-Carrier-Pipe Gasket: AWWA C111, EPDM rubber
5. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,
zinc-coated steel pipe.
2.15 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to

ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Division 15 Section 15145
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements in Division 15 Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for
pressure-reducing valves.
H. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and
plumb.
I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint
devices.
K. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building
occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal,
and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
N. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
O. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or
higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Q. Install piping free of sags and bends.
R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
S. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
T. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
U. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and
packaged booster pump.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
"Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube
and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools
recommended by fitting manufacturer.
G. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with
manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to
measured depth.
H. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll groove end of tube. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for roll-grooved joints.
J. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with
housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings
according to AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut-grooved joints.
K. Steel-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

L. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type,
and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts
according to ASME B31.9.
M. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
N. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
O. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15111 "General-

Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.
B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures
or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing
fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal
piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 15
Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.
D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of
each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow.
Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15145 "Domestic
Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge
side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but
not stop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15145 "Domestic Water
Piping Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.
3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic
water pump.
B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
3.8 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation and install water meters
according to utility company's requirements.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company.
C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the
following:
D. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve
on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities
E. Install turbine-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on
water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities having
jurisdiction.
F. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and
on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete
piers.
G. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on
full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or
concrete piers.
H. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of

A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15073 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15061 "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
E. Install hangers for PPR pipe with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 30 inches (750 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 33 inches (850 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-
mm) rod.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (40 and DN 50): 43 inches (1100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 59 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 75 to DN 125): 71 inches (1800 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 48 m (1200 mm).
G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
rod.
3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-
mm) rod.
4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.
J. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches (1500 mm) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and
smaller, and every 72 inches (1800 mm) for NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and larger.

K. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
L. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
M. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-
mm) rod.
mm) rod.
N. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
O. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and
connect to the following:
1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 15
“plumbing fixture” Section 15140 for connection sizes.
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.11 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION
A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
B. Escutcheons for New Piping:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast
brass with polished chrome-plated finish.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished

5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set screw.
6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.
C. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split casting, cast brass with chrome-plated finish.

2. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge
and spring clips.
3. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast
brass with chrome-plated finish.
4. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with
5. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split casting, cast brass with polished
6. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split plate, stamped steel with set screw or spring
clips.
7. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting floor plate.
3.12 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in
floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
using sleeve seals specified in this Section.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe.
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment
Areas or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron
sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is
specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-
iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and

Trim" for flashing.
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
a. PVC pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste pipes
for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.
4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe.
5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.
d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.
6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:
a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with
requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestop
materials and installations.
3.13 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into
building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position
pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.14 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.
B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of
sleeve pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve
pipe in housing.
3.15 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section 15076

"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and
installation.
B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
3.17 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate
flow.
a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping

to provide flow of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction;
if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear
at outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50

ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24
hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200
ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods
are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear
at outlets.
b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.
3.19 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller,
shall be one of the following:
1. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipes, Fitting & Valves. DIN 8074/
DIN 8075, jointing shall be as follows:
• Pipes sizes 150mm and larger – Butt fusion joint and fittings (including suction and
discharge to equipment /tank).
• Connection to pump – Flange adapter.Retain "one of" option in first paragraph below
to allow GENERAL CONTRACTOR to select piping materials from those retained.
Piping for this application matches exterior underground water-service piping
specified in Division 2 Section "Water Distribution."
E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the
following:
1. Polypropylene Pipes (PPR) PN-20 with Fusion Joint Connections DIN 16968/DIN 16969
• Connection to each fixture – compression joint fittings.
• Horizontal suspended piping – Socket fusion joint and fittings.
• Riser (including main branch out) – Electrofusion joint and fittings.
F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be[ one
of] the following:
1. Polypropylene Pipes (PPR) PN-20 with Fusion Joint Connections DIN 16968/DIN 16969
• Connection to each fixture – compression joint fittings.
• Horizontal suspended piping – Socket fusion joint and fittings.
• Riser (including main branch out) – Electrofusion joint and fittings.
3.20 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use
butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.
4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from
equipment.
C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
D. CPVC and PVC valves matching piping materials may be used.
3.21 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train EMPLOYER’S maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to
Section 17100 "Commissioning."
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Domestic Water Piping Specialties SECTION 15145
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS .................................................................................................................. 2
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS ........................................................................................................... 2
2.3 W ATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES ...................................................................................... 4
2.4 BALANCING VALVES................................................................................................................... 4
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC W ATER PIPING ................................................................................ 5
2.6 HOSE STATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.7 HOSE BIBBS .............................................................................................................................. 6
2.8 DRAIN VALVES .......................................................................................................................... 6
2.9 W ATER HAMMER ARRESTERS .................................................................................................... 7
2.10 AIR VENTS ................................................................................................................................ 7
2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES ...................................................................................................... 8
2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS.................................................................................................... 8
2.13 MULTI-MEDIA DEPTH FILTERS .................................................................................................... 8
2.14 ACTUATED CARBON FILTERS ..................................................................................................... 9
2.15 ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZER ........................................................................................................ 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION .........................................................................................................................11
3.1 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................... 11
3.2 CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 LABELING AND CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................. 12
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL......................................................................................................... 13
3.5 ADJUSTING.............................................................................................................................. 13

Domestic Water Piping Specialties.doc
SECTION 15145
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Water pressure-reducing valves.
4. Balancing valves.
5. Strainers.
6. Hose stations.
7. Hose bibbs.
8. Drain valves.
9. Water hammer arresters.
10. Air vents.
11. Trap-seal primer valves.
12. Trap-seal primer systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

2. Division 15 Section 15471 "Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic
water piping.
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 150 psig (1035 kPa),
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
domestic water piping components.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects;
Sections 1 through 9."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

2. Standard: ASSE 1001.
3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
6. Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
5. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:

4. Body: Bronze.
5. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged, for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through, vertical inlet, horizontal
center section, and vertical outlet or vertical flow.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet
of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or steel with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved stainless steel] for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) and larger.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 (DN 50) and
smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet
of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:

4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.
E. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
c. Woodford Manufacturing Company.

3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).
5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.
F. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:
2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with
test-procedure instructions.

2.3 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators

3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa).
4. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with
interior lining complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
5. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
B. Water Control Valves:
2. Description: Pilot-operation, diaphragm-type, single-seated main water control valve.

3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot-control
valve, restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.
4. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved,
interior epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
a. Trim: Stainless steel.
5. Design Outlet Pressure Setting:

(DN 65) and larger.
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:

2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting
indicator.
3. Body: Brass ,
4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50).
5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying
case.
B. Cast-Iron Calibrated Balancing Valves:

2. Type: Adjustable with Y-pattern globe valve, two readout ports, and memory-setting
indicator.
3. Size: Same as connected piping, but not smaller than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65).
C. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
D. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.
3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
4. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller.
5. Body: Copper alloy.
6. Port: Standard or full port.

7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and
larger.
(DN 65) and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm), 0.033 inch (0.84
mm), 0.062 inch (1.57 mm).
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm),
0.062 inch (1.57 mm), 0.125 inch (3.18 mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm), 0.125 inch (3.18
mm), 0.25 inch (6.35 mm).
6. Drain: Pipe plug, Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
2.6 HOSE STATIONS
B. Single-Temperature-Water Hose Stations:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1.

2. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handle, hose connection, and
hose rack. Include thermometer in front.
3. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
4. Body Material: Bronze with stainless-steel wetted parts.
5. Body Finish: Rough bronze, chrome plated.
6. Mounting: Wall, with reinforcement.
7. Supply Fitting: gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and copper, water tubing.
Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.
8. Hose: Manufacturer's standard, for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; long.
9. Nozzle: With hand squeeze on-off control.
10. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type,
hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer
complying with ASSE 1052; and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
on outlet.
C. Cold-Water Hose Stations:

2. Type Faucet: Thermostatic mixing valve.
3. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection,
and hose rack. Include thermometer in front.
6. Body Finish: Rough bronze or chrome plate.

8. Supply Fittings: Two gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves and copper, water
tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are included with fitting.
on outlet.
D. Cold-Water and Steam Hose Stations:

2. Type Faucet: Thermostatic mixing valve.
3. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handles, hose connection,
and hose rack. Include thermometer in front.
6. Body Finish: Rough bronze or chrome plate.
8. Supply Fittings: Two gate, globe, or ball valves and check valves and copper, water
tubing. Omit check valves if check stops are included with fitting.
on outlet.
2.7 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint
inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-
connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.8 DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: Copper alloy.
5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: Class 125.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze.
5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder joint.
6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.
C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:
1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.
2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or Class 125.
3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.
5. Drain: NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side outlet with cap.
2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water Hammer Arresters:

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
3. Type: Copper tube with piston.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.10 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60
deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Stainless steel.

2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum pressure rating.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not
chrome finished.
B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup
connection.
3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum.
4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.
2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:

2. Standard: ASSE 1044,
3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water
tubing.
4. Cabinet: Recessed-mounting steel box with stainless-steel cover.
5. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac
power.
6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.
7. Number Outlets: Four
8. Size Outlets: NPS 1/2 (DN 15)
2.13 MULTI-MEDIA DEPTH FILTERS
A. The depth filters shall remove particular matter, turbidity and organics from water at
normal flow rate of 12.62 lps with a pressure drop of 10 m.
B. The filter tank shall be 1500mm in diameter. The sideshell height shall be 1500mm,
sufficient to allow adequate freeboard space during the backwashing. The tank shall
be designed for 125 psi ASME construction. The tank shall be supported by steel legs
that permit skid mounting and apply with phenolic epoxy to a 10 mil thickness and
o
then baked at 450 C. The exterior shall be sand blasted, painted with a rust-inhibiting
primer, and then finished with a gloss epoxy top coat of 15 mil. The tank shall be
equipped with an opening in the top head for mineral filling and periodic inspection.
C. The filter tank shall have stainless upper distributor which shall disperse water later-
ally to minimize channelling within the media bed. No slots shall face upward minimiz-
ing the opportunity of channelling. Proper underbedding media shall be provided to
aid in the even collection of water and make efficient use of filtering capability of the
media.
D. The filter tank shall have a four layer media bed which is designed to operate as a
depth filter rather than a surface filter. The top layer shall collect coarse turbidity. The
middle layer shall accumulate particles normally trapped by sand filters. The bottom

layer of high density fine material shall polish the water by removing particles down to
10 microns in size. Mineral density, particle size, uniformity coefficient, and depth of
each layer shall be carefully controlled to assure proper stratification after backwash,
and optimum performance in service.
E. The automatic control shall be of top mounted design and all-brass construction. It
shall utilize a bolt-down flange connection to permit proper positioning between the
valve and conditioner tank opening. It shall have provision for either left-hand or right-
hand raw water plumbing to simplify installation while maintaining a forward facing
timer for easy servicing. The control shall be fully automatic multi-port control have
operated by a rotary pilot that hydraulically or pneumatically activates cartridge style
diaphragm valves to accomplish regeneration. The multi-port valve shall incorporate
self-adjusting flow regulators to control the rate of flow during backwash and rinse,
regardless of pressure fluctuations between 30 and 100 psi. The control shall open
and close slowly to prevent noise and hydraulic shock. It shall have provision for by-
pass of raw water during the regeneration cycle or elimination of the bypass, depend-
ing upon the requirements. The electrical control mechanism shall be enclosed in a
gasketed, moisture resistant case. The enclosure shall conform to EMA 3R enclosure
standards. The unit shall have provisions for individual adjustment of backwash and
rinse cycle, and provisions for manually regenerating the water by means of inlet hy-
draulic pressure even without the use of electric power. A pressure differential switch
shall be provided so that the backwash of the filter can be initiated when the headloss
reaches a preset limit. The pressure differential switch shall be field adjustable within
a range from 3 psi to 20 psi. Inlet and outlet gauges with isolation valves shall be
supplied to visually observe drop across the filter. A triplex alternator shall be pro-
vided which shall allow two units of a triplex system to be online at a given time while
the other unit is either in regeneration or in standby. The alternator shall be adaptable
to pressure differential switch. Indicators shall be provided to show which unit is in
service.
F. A complete set of instructions covering the installation and operation of the filter unit
shall be provided in booklet form. All major components such as tanks, distributors
and controls shall be designed, and assembled by a single source for optimum capa-
bility. The depth filter system shall have a written warranty on workmanship and ma-
terials.
G. Similar to Culligan Hi-Flo Depth Filter Model HD36 or approved equal.
2.14 ACTUATED CARBON FILTERS
A. The carbon filters shall remove color, odor and organics from water at normal flow
rate of 11.99 lps with a pressure drop of 11 m.
B. The filter tank shall be 2100mm in diameter. The sideshell height shall be 1500mm,
sufficient to allow adequate freeboard space during the backwashing. The tank shall
be designed for 125 psi ASME construction. The tank shall be supported by steel legs
that permit skid mounting and apply with phenolic epoxy to a 10 mil thickness and
o
then baked at 450 C. The exterior shall be sand blasted, painted with a rust-inhibiting
primer, and then finished with a gloss epoxy top coat of 15 mil. The tank shall be
equipped with an opening in the top head for mineral filling and periodic inspection.
C. The automatic control shall be of top mounted design and all-brass construction. It
shall utilize a bolt-down flange connection to permit proper positioning between the
valve and conditioner tank opening. It shall have provision for either left-hand or right-
hand raw water plumbing to simplify installation while maintaining a forward facing
timer for easy servicing. The control shall be fully automatic multi-port control have
operated by a rotary pilot that hydraulically or pneumatically activates cartridge style
diaphragm valves to accomplish regeneration. The multi-port valve shall incorporate

self-adjusting flow regulators to control the rate of flow during backwash and rinse,
regardless of pressure fluctuations between 30 and 100 psi. The control shall open
and close slowly to prevent noise and hydraulic shock. It shall have provision for by-
pass of raw water during the regeneration cycle or elimination of the bypass, depend-
ing upon the requirements. The electrical control mechanism shall be enclosed in a
gasketed, moisture resistant case. The enclosure shall conform to EMA 3R enclosure
standards. The unit shall have provisions for individual adjustment of backwash and
rinse cycle, and provisions for manually regenerating the water by means of inlet hy-
draulic pressure even without the use of electric power. A pressure differential switch
shall be provided so that the backwash of the filter can be initiated when the headloss
reaches a preset limit. The pressure differential switch shall be field adjustable within
a range from 3 psi to 20 psi. Inlet and outlet gauges with isolation valves shall be
supplied to visually observe drop across the filter. A triplex alternator shall be pro-
vided which shall allow two units of a triplex system to be online at a given time while
the other unit is either in regeneration or in standby. The alternator shall be adaptable
to pressure differential switch. Indicators shall be provided to allow which unit is in
service.
D. A complete set of instructions covering the installation and operation of the filter unit
shall be provided in booklet form. All major components such as tanks, distributors
and controls shall be designed, and assembled by a single source for optimum capa-
bility. The carbon filter system shall have a written warranty on workmanship and ma-
terials.
E. Similar to Culligan Hi-Flo activate of Carbon Filter Model HR-54 or approved equal.
2.15 ULTRAVIOLET STERILIZER
Furnish and install ultraviolet sterilizer (UVS) with reaction chamber made of stainless steel
316L. the chamber internal and external surfaces shall be electropolished. The UVS shall re-
movable heads, monitoring drain and sample ports, remote NEMA 4X (IP56) stainless steel
enclosure, running time meter, LED lamp status indicators, 12,000 hour lamp, high-heat ves-
sel shutoff, UV intensity monitoring, hand-off-auto (HOA) switch, PLC control, skid mounting
and automatic cleaning system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and
to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-
gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two
pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached
to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this
application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop
balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
E. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
F. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
G. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-
reducing valve, solenoid valve and pump.
H. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-

treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fire-retardant-treated-wood
blocking is specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
I. Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on
outlet.
1. Install shutoff valve on outlet if specified.

2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install
2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement
between studs. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 6
Section "Rough Carpentry."
J. Install ground hydrants with 1 cu. yd. (0.75 cu. m) of crushed gravel around drain hole. Set
ground hydrants with box flush with grade.
K. Install draining-type post hydrants with 1 cu. yd. (0.75 cu. m) of crushed gravel around drain
hole. Set post hydrants in concrete paving or in 1 cu. ft. (0.03 cu. m) of concrete block at
grade.

L. Install nonfreeze, nondraining-type post hydrants set in concrete or pavement.
M. Install freeze-resistant yard hydrants with riser pipe set in concrete or pavement. Do not
encase canister in concrete.
N. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
O. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor
drain.
P. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap
a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve
for proper flow.
Q. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet
fitting.
R. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum
of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper
flow.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
C. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3 LABELING AND CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate

or sign on or near each of the following:
1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.
3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
4. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.
5. Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers.
6. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers.
7. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies.
8. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers.
9. Water pressure-reducing valves.
10. Calibrated balancing valves.
11. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.
12. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
13. Photographic-process, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies.
14. Primary water tempering valves.
15. Outlet boxes.
16. Hose stations.
17. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
18. Trap-seal primer systems.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in
addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section
15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping & Equipment".

A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker, reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer,

double-check backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly
backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's
reference standard.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as
specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping SECTION 15150
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE.................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ....................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS .............................................................. 2
2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS............................................................................. 3
2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS ............................................................................................................... 3
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING ....................................................................... 4
PART 3 – EXECUTION .......................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................................. 5
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................. 6
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION................................................................................................................. 8
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 8
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 8
3.7 CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 10
3.9 CLEANING................................................................................................................................. 11
3.10 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................ 12

Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping.doc
SECTION 15150
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
B. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified

in this and other sections referenced. These include, but are not limited to,
commissioning, enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual,
and detailed training of the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
1. Division 15 Section 15445 "Sewage Pumps."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall
be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to
ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,
including printed statement of VOC content.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer

for selecting seismic restraints.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
D. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials,"
for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain,
waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic
continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 M ANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:

Supplier”.
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy class (es).
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and
deaerator drainage fittings.
C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-

resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-

steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and
ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment

and Supplier”.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield,

stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

and Supplier”.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece,

cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber
sleeve.

and Supplier”.
D. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type

mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-
resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

and Supplier”.
2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric,

sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as
piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening
mechanism on each end.

Supplier”.
2. Sleeve Materials:
a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926,
PVC.
c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible
with pipe materials being joined.
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve

with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension
band and tightening mechanism on each end.


Supplier”.
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type

reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE
material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on
each end.

Supplier”.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with
pressure rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

Supplier”.
E. Center-Sleeve Material: Carbon steel.
F. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
G. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
H. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-
joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint
section and ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.

Supplier”.
I. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping

sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for
expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and
steel bolts.

Supplier”.
J. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and

flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron
glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

Supplier”.
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of

0.004-inch (0.10-mm) or LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness.
B. Form: tube.
C. Color: natural.

3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the
following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard,
shielded, stainless-steel, heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel and rigid,
unshielded couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, Rigid, unshielded,
nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small
difference in OD.
C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be the following:
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard, and
heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:
1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any
of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed, calking materials;
and calked joints.
2. Bell & Spigot tapped cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded,
stainless-steel, heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel, heavy-duty shielded,
cast-iron and rigid, unshielded couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
G. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the
following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed, calking materials;
and calked joints.
2. Bell & Spigot tapped cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded,
stainless-steel, heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel and heavy-duty shielded,
cast-iron couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
H. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50)
shall be the following:
1. Ductile iron pipe & flange fittings confirming to ANSI A21, A10, 11, 50 and 51
class 56 or approved equivalent.

2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.
I. Aboveground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150)

shall be any of the following:
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and
grooved joints.
J. Underground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any
of the following:
K. Underground sanitary-sewage force mains NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of
the following:
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and
grooved joints.
A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "Sanitary
Sewerage."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

Mechanical Materials and Methods."
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in

Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to
building sanitary sewers.
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main
piping.
F. Install underground, steel, force-main piping. Install encasement on piping according

to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install

buried piping inside the building between wall and floor penetrations and connection
to sanitary sewer piping outside the building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to
wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
H. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.

I. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service
pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links
required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are
specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
J. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation

wall. Make installation watertight.
K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105.
L. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using
appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep
1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from
horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2
fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight
tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of
flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if
pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
M. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true
to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends
of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
N. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping

NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping
NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
O. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having

jurisdiction.
2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having
jurisdiction.
P. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-
grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.
Q. Install PVC vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.
R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved
by authorities having jurisdiction.
S. Install vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section

"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-
free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each
sewage pump discharge.
D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type,

2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral
backwater valve.
3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
4. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section 15155 "Plumbing
Specialties."
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section 15073 "Vibrations and

Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment”
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis
hangers.
b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller
hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring
cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS
Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section 15061 "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-
inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch
(16-mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch
(22-mm) rod.
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-
mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters:
K. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet (3 m).
L. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
inch (10-mm) rod.

4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

M. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
N. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
inch (10-mm) rod.
3. NPS 4 and 5 (DN 100 and 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)
rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch
(22-mm) rod.
O. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
P. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by plumbing code.
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if
indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for
connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Connect force-main piping to the following:
1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main or sanitary manhole.

2. Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction
to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with
requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have
been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,
submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of
piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced
drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work
that was covered or concealed before it was tested.
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping,
except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in
piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot
head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to
completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set
and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and
watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they
leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch
wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to
measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing
fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced

force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that
was covered or concealed before it was tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above
operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system
materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and
debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.10 PROTECTION
A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two
coats of water-based latex paint.
3.11 COMMISSIONING
3.12 DEMONSTRATION
A. Factory-authorized service representative shall train EMPLOYER’S maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Plumbing equipment, instrumentation and
controls.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties SECTION 15155
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
1.6 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES ................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 CLEANOUTS .............................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS .......................................................................................................................... 4
2.4 TRENCH DRAINS ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.5 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS................................................................................................... 5
2.6 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES .................................................................................................... 7
2.7 AIR-REMITTANCE VALVES .......................................................................................................... 8
2.8 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES ........................................................................ 8
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES ........................................................ 8
2.10 FLASHING MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 9
2.11 GREASE INTERCEPTORS ..........................................................................................................10
2.12 OIL INTERCEPTORS..................................................................................................................10
2.13 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS............................................................................................................11
2.14 MOTORS .................................................................................................................................11
PART 3 - EXECUTION .........................................................................................................................11
3.1 CONCRETE BASES ...................................................................................................................11
3.2 INSTALLATION..........................................................................................................................11
3.3 CONNECTIONS.........................................................................................................................14
3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................................14
3.5 LABELLING AND IDENTIFYING ....................................................................................................15
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.........................................................................................................15
3.7 PROTECTION ...........................................................................................................................15
3.8 DEMONSTRATION.....................................................................................................................15

Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties.doc
SECTION 15155
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1. Backwater valves.
2. Cleanouts.
3. Floor drains.
4. Trench drains.
5. Channel drainage systems.
6. Air-admittance valves.
7. Roof flashing assemblies.
8. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
9. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
10. Flashing materials.
11. Grease interceptors.
12. Oil interceptors.
13. Solids interceptors.
1. Division 15 Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for
storm water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch
basins.
2. Division 15 Section 15410 "Plumbing Fixtures" for hair interceptors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and accessories for the following:
1. FOG disposal systems.

3. Grease removal devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that grease

interceptors, oil interceptors accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment." Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and
the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
sanitary piping specialty components.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

1.7 EXTRA M ATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Cultures: Provide 1-gal. (3.8-L) bottles of bacteria culture recommended by

manufacturer of FOG disposal systems equal to 200 percent of amount installed, but
no fewer than 2 1-gal. (3.8-L) bottles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves:
B. Horizontal, Plastic Backwater Valves:

2. Size: Same as connected piping.
3. Body: ABS or PVC.
4. Cover: Same material as body with threaded access to check valve.
5. Check Valve: Removable swing check.
6. End Connections: Socket type.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron and ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for
cleanout test tee.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4. Body Material: Stainless-steel tee with side cleanout as required to match connected
piping.
5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug.
6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule cleanout.
3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing.
5. Body or Ferrule: Stainless steel.
6. Clamping Device: Required.
7. Outlet Connection: Threaded.
8. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.
9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round or Square.
12. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy Duty.
13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to
cleanout.


16. Housing: Stainless steel.
17. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
18. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected
piping.
5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug.
7. Wall Access: Round flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with
screw.
8. Wall Access: Round or Square, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-
installation frame and cover.
D. Plastic Floor Cleanouts :

3. Body: PVC.
4. Closure Plug: PVC.
5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage piping.
2.3 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3
3. Pattern: Area Floor drain.
4. Body Material: Gray iron.
5. Seepage Flange: Required.
6. Anchor Flange: Required.
8. Outlet: Bottom or Side.
9. Backwater Valve: Integral, ASME A112.14.1, swing-check type.
10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel.
11. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
12. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Stainless steel.
14. Top Shape: Round or Square..
15. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
16. Trap Material: Bronze or Cast iron.
17. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
18. Trap Features: Cleanout.
B. Stainless-Steel Floor Drains:

2. Standard: ASME A112.3.1 or ASME A112.6.3.
4. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.
5. Top Shape: Round or Square.
6. Trap Material: Cast iron or Stainless steel.

C. Plastic Floor Drains:

3. Material: ABS or PVC.
4. Seepage Flange: Required.
7. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
8. Top or Strainer Material: Plastic or Stainless steel.
9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Stainless steel.
10. Top Shape: Round or Square.
11. Trap Material: Plastic drainage piping.
2.4 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains :

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.
3. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
4. Flange: Seepage.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
8. Grate Finish: Painted.
9. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy-Duty.
10. Trap Material: Cast iron.
2.5 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Stainless-Steel Channel Drainage Systems:

2. Type: Modular system of stainless-steel channel sections, grates, and
appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or
rattling.
a. Standard: ASME A112.3.1, for trench drains.

b. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, stainless-steel with level invert.
1) Dimensions: 5.8 inches (147 mm) 11.7 inches (297mm) wide. Include
number of units required to form total lengths indicated.
c. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations,

and of width and thickness that fit recesses in channels.
1) Material: Galvanized steel.

2) Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates
to channel sections.
d. Covers: Solid ductile or gray iron, of width and thickness that fit recesses in
channels, and of lengths indicated.
e. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless
otherwise indicated.

f. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by

system manufacturer.
3. Type: Modular system of stainless-steel channel sections, grates, and

appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or
rattling.
a. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, stainless steel with level invert.
1) Dimensions: 6 inches (152 mm) 12 inches (305 mm) wide. Include

number of units required to form total lengths indicated.
b. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations,

and of width and thickness that fit recesses in channels.
1) Material: Ductile iron.

c. Covers: Solid ductile or gray iron, of width and thickness that fit recesses in
channels, and of lengths indicated.
d. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless
e. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by
B. Polymer-Concrete Channel Drainage Systems:
2. Type: Modular system of channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so

grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling.
a. Channel Sections: Narrow, interlocking-joint, sloped-invert, polymer-concrete

modular units with end caps. Include rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope
of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated.
Include extension sections necessary for required depth.
1) Inside width. Include number of units required to form Dimensions: 4-

inch (102-mm) total lengths indicated.
2) Frame: Gray-iron or galvanized steel for grates.
b. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations,

and of width and thickness that fit recesses in channel sections.

c. Covers: Solid ductile or gray iron, of width and thickness that fit recesses in
channel sections, and of lengths indicated.
d. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless
e. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by
f. Channel Sections: Narrow, interlocking-joint, precast, polymer-concrete
modular units with end caps. Include rounded bottom, with level invert and
with NPS 4 (DN 100) outlets in number and locations indicated.

1) Dimensions: 5-inch (127-mm)ninside width and [9-3/4 inches (248 mm)

deep. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated.
g. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations,


h. Covers: Solid ductile or gray iron, of width and thickness that fit recesses in
i. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless
j. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by
k. Channel Sections: Wide, interlocking-joint, precast, polymer-concrete modular
units with end caps. Include flat or rounded bottom, with level invert and with
outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated.
1) Dimensions: 8-inch (203-mm) inside width and 13-3/4 inches (350 mm)
deep. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated.
l. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations,


to channel section].
m. Covers: Solid ductile or gray iron, of width and thickness that fit recesses in
n. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless
o. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by
C. Polymer-Concrete Sediment Interceptor :
1. Description: 27-inch- (686-mm-) square, precast, polymer-concrete body, with outlets

in number and sizes indicated. Include 24-inch- (610-mm-) square, gray-iron slotted
grate.
2. Frame: Gray-iron or galvanized steel for grates.
2.6 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 0.0938-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, lead flashing

collar and skirt extending at least 10 inches (250 mm) from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot
reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.7 AIR-REMITTANCE VALVES
A. Fixture Air-Admittance Valves

2. Standard: ASSE 1051, Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping.
3. Housing: Plastic.
4. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
5. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.
B. Stack Air-Admittance

2. Standard: ASSE 1050 for vent stacks.
3. Housing: Plastic.
4. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
5. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
C. Wall Box

2. Description: White plastic housing with white plastic grille, made for recessed
installation. Include bottom pipe connection and space to contain one air-admittance
valve.
3. Size: About 9 inches wide by 8 inches high by 4 inches deep (230 mm wide by 200
mm high by 100 mm deep).
2.8 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC
protective cap for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.
B. Deep-Seal Traps:
1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
D. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap
between installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated
indirect waste piping.
E. Sleeve Flashing Device:
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve
for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe
extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm) above
finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend
through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
F. Stack Flashing Fittings:
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
G. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.
Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
H. Expansion Joints:
1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
2.10 FLASHING M ATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm) thickness.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-
mm) minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic
2.11 GREASE INTERCEPTORS
A. Grease Interceptors:

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI-G10], for intercepting and retaining fats, oils,
and greases from food[-preparation or processing wastewater.
3. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required.
4. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.
5. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
7. Body Extension: Required.
8. Flow Rate: Refer to Plan
9. Grease Retention Capacity: refer to plan
10. Inlet and Outlet Size: refer to plan
11. End Connections: Hub or Threaded.
12. Cleanout: Integral[ .
13. Mounting: refer to plan.
14. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
15. Operation: Semiautomatic, manual drawoff.
2.12 OIL INTERCEPTORS
A. Oil Interceptors:

2. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil from
wastewater.
6. Body Dimensions: Refer to plan
7. Flow Rate: Refer to plan
8. Inlet and Outlet Size: Refer to plan
9. Mounting: Refer to plan

2.13 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS
A. Solids Interceptors

2. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor made for removing and retaining lint and
sediment from wastewater.
4. Interior Separation Device: Baffles and Screens.
7. Body Dimensions: Refer to plans.
8. End Connections: Threaded.
9. Mounting: Refer to plans.
2.14 MOTORS
A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section 15057 "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 16 Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Anchor grease interceptors, grease removal devices and solids interceptors to concrete
bases.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 19-inch (480-mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
2. For installed equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be imbedded.
equipment.
5. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section 15052
"Common Work Results for Plumbing."
6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in
Division 3.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section 15052 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout
deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size
to remove valve cover for servicing.
C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger
drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller
and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not
greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according
to ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.
I. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will
be flush with adjacent surface.
J. Assemble FRP channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.
K. Assemble plastic channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

L. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.
M. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.
N. Install air-admittance-valve wall boxes recessed in wall.
O. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through
roof.
P. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

Q. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.
R. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch (25 mm) 2 inches (51 mm)
above floor.
S. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
T. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
U. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.
V. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
W. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
X. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch
(25-mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
Y. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
Z. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-
mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
AA. Assemble components of FOG disposal systems and install on floor. Install trap, vent,
fresh-air inlet, and flow-control fitting according to authorities having jurisdiction. Install shelf
fastened to reinforcement in wall construction and adjacent to unit, unless otherwise
indicated. Install culture bottle, culture metering pump, timer, and control on shelf. Install
tubing between culture bottle, metering pump, and chamber.
BB. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle
supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral
cleanout on outlet.
CC. Install grease removal devices on floor. Install trap, vent, and flow-control fitting according
to authorities having jurisdiction. Install control panel adjacent to unit, unless otherwise
indicated.
DD. Install oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. Coordinate oil-interceptor
storage tank and gravity drain with Division 15 Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."

EE. Install solids interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors that do
not have integral cleanout on outlet. Install trap on interceptors that do not have integral
trap and are connected to sanitary drainage and vent systems.
FF. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
GG. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
HH. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. FOG Disposal Systems: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, connect flow-control fitting and
fresh-air inlet piping to unit inlet piping, and connect vent piping between trap and media
chamber. Connect electrical power.
D. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and
vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
E. Grease Removal Devices: Connect controls, electrical power, factory-furnished

accessories, and inlet, outlet, and vent piping to unit.
F. Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-control
fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil storage tank.
G. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
H. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes
are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-
mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m),
0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches
(250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
A. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.5 LABELLING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate

or sign on or near each of the following:
3. Solids interceptors.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in
addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section
15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect field-assembled grease removal devices and their installation, including piping
and electrical connections, and to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris
and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain grease removal devices. Refer to Division 1
Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Storm Drainage Piping SECTION 15160
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................. 1
1.5 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 2

2.1 MANUFACTURERS...................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 2
2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS ............................................................ 2
2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS .......................................................................... 2
2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS .............................................................................................................. 3
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING ...................................................................... 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 4

3.1 EXCAVATION ............................................................................................................................. 4
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................................ 4
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION................................................................................................................. 5
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 7
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 7
3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION ....................................................................................... 7
3.7 CONNECTIONS........................................................................................................................... 9
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................... 9
3.9 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................... 10
3.10 DEMONSTRATION..................................................................................................................... 10

Storm Drainage Piping.DOC
SECTION 15160
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of
the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Special pipe fittings.
3. Encasement for underground metal piping.
1. Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps."
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.
C. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.
A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa)

2. Storm Drainage, Force-Main Piping: 150 psig (1035 kPa)
B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be
capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7,
"Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for

selecting seismic restraints.
2. Controlled-Flow Storm Drainage System: Include calculations, plans, and details.
C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for
plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and
"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 M ANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy class (es).
B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.
2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaera-
tor drainage fittings.
C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-

resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corru-

gated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber
sleeve.

a. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and

Supplier”.
2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stain-

less-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

Supplier”.
3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron

housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

Supplier”.
D. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type me-

chanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal
tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
a. Acceptable Manufacturers: See section 15007 “Alternative Equipment and Supplier”.
2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS
A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-
type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be
joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with
full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and
tightening mechanism on each end.
C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or

transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with
corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. ANACO.
D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

2. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard
3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.
4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.
E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-joint
ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball-joint section and
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts.

F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping

sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections
complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for
expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel
bolts.
G. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing
sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with
AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets,
and steel bolts.
2.6 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING
A. A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-

inch (0.10-mm) or LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness.
B. Form: Sheet or tube
C. Color: Black or natural
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be any of the
following:
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-
steel couplings; and coupled joints.
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be any of the
following:
D. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller shall be any of the
following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed; calking
materials; and calked joints.

E. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger shall be any of the
following:
1. Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed calking
materials; and calked joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel heavy-duty
shielded, stainless-steel and heavy-duty shielded, cast-iron couplings; and coupled
joints.
F. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50 shall
be any of the following:
1. Ductile iron pipe and flange fitting confirming to ANSI A21, A10, 11, 50 and 51 class
56 or approved equivalent.
G. Aboveground storm drainage force mains NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 6 (DN 65 and DN 150shall
be any of the following:
1. Ductile iron pipe and flange fitting confirming to ANSI A21, A10, 11, 50 and 51 class
56 or approved equivalent.
3. Grooved-end steel pipe, grooved-joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved
joints.
H. Underground storm drainage force mains NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the
following:

2. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings; glands,
gaskets, and bolts; and mechanical-joint joints.
3. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; push-on-joint, ductile-iron fittings; gaskets; and
gasketed joints.
4. Pressure pipe couplings if dissimilar pipe materials or piping with small difference in
OD must be joined.
A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 2 Section
"Storm Drainage."
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section 15073 "Vibration
and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15

Section 15073 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building
storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 15 Section 15165 "Plumbing Specialties."
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main
piping.

F. Install underground, steel, force-main piping. Install encasement on piping according to

ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
G. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer
piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-
block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
H. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."
I. Install underground, ductile-iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600.
J. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
K. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation
wall. Make installation watertight.
L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
M. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends,
and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper
size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing
size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
N. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true
to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of
piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for
use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and
pull past each joint as completed.
O. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
(DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4
(DN 100) and larger.
2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
P. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
Q. Install engineered controlled-flow storm drainage piping in locations indicated.
R. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.

S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
C. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's
"Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-
alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe and assemble grooved ends of pipes, grooved-
end fittings, and grooved-end-piping couplings according to AWWA C606.
G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.
A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section 15111 "Ground
Duty Valves."
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge.
1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump
pump discharge.
D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.
1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type, unless
2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.
3. Backwater valve are specified in Division 15 Section 15160 "Plumbing Specialties."
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section 15073 " Vibration and Seismic
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"
B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 15 Section 15061 "Hangers and
Supports." Install the following:
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44,
pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
C. Install supports according to Division 15 Section 15061 "Hangers and Supports."
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm)
minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-
mm) rod.
mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for
fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.
I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
mm) rod.
4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

L. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
mm) rod.
mm) rod.
5. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm)
rod.
M. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.
D. Connect force-main piping to the following:
1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main or storm manhole.

2. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm
drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion
of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of

overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before
inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints
for leaks.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Factory-authorized service representative shall train EMPLOYER’S maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain Plumbing equipment, instrumentation and controls.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Storm Drainage Piping Specialties SECTION 15165
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 1

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS ................................................................................................................ 1
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES ............................................................ 4
2.3 CLEANOUTS .............................................................................................................................. 4
2.4 BACKWATER VALVES ................................................................................................................. 5
2.5 TRENCH DRAINS ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES ........................................................................ 6
2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................... 6

3.1 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 6
3.2 CONNECTIONS........................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................ 7
3.4 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................. 8

Storm Drainage Piping Specialties.DOC
SECTION 15165
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Roof drains.
2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.
3. Cleanouts.
4. Backwater valves.
5. Trench drains.
6. Channel drainage systems.
7. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
8. Flashing materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
3. Body Material: Cast iron
4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch (357-mm)diameter.
5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
6. Flow-Control Weirs: Required.
7. Outlet: Bottom
8. Extension Collars: Required.
9. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
10. Expansion Joint: Required.
11. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
12. Dome Material: Stainless steel.
13. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel.
14. Vandal-Proof Dome: Required.
15. Water Dam: Not required.

B. Cast-Iron, Medium-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.
3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Dimension of Body: 8- to 12-inch (203- to 305-mm) diameter.
5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
6. Flow-Control Weirs: Required.
7. Outlet: Bottom
12. Dome Material: Stainless steel.
13. Wire Mesh: Stainless steel or brass over dome
14. Perforated Gravel Guard: Not required.
16. Water Dam: Not required.
C. Metal, Cornice and Gutter Roof Drains

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for cornice and gutter roof drains.
3. Body Material: Metal.
4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 6-inch (152-mm) diameter.
5. Outlet: Bottom.
6. Dome Material: Bronze.
D. Metal, Parapet Roof Drains

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for parapet roof drains.
4. Outlet: Back or Angle.
5. Grate Material: Cast iron.
6. Vandal-Proof Grate: Required.
E. Metal, Large-Sump, Promenade Roof Drains

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for promenade roof drains.
5. Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 14 inches (357 mm)square.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
F. Metal, Medium-Sump, Promenade Roof Drains:

4. Dimension of Body: 11- to 12-inch (280- to 305-mm) diameter.

5. Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 12 inches (305 mm) square.

6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Grate Material: Cast iron
G. Metal, Small-Sump, Promenade Roof Drains

5. Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 8 inches (203 mm) square.
6. Outlet: Bottom.
H. Metal, Medium-Sump, Deck Roof Drains:

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for deck roof drains; ASME A112.6.3, for floor drains.
4. Flange: Anchor with weep holes.
6. Integral Backwater Valve: Required.
7. Outlet: Bottom.
10. Overall Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 14 inches (357 mm) round or
square.
11. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
12. Vandal-Proof Frame and Grate: Required.
I. Metal, Small-Sump, Deck Roof Drains

2. drains.
4. Flange: Anchor with weep holes.
6. Integral Backwater Valve: Required.
7. Outlet: Bottom.
10. Overall Dimension of Frame and Grate: Nominal 8 inches (203 mm) round or square.
11. Top-Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
12. Vandal-Proof Frame and Grate: Required

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Downspout Adaptors
1. Description: Manufactured, gray-iron casting, for attaching to horizontal-outlet,

parapet roof drain and to exterior, sheet metal downspout.
2. Size: Inlet size to match parapet drain outlet.
B. Downspout Boots
1. Description: Manufactured, ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron casting, with strap or ears
for attaching to building; NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet; and shop-applied bituminous
coating.
2. Size: Inlet size to match downspout and NPS 4 (DN 100) outlet.
C. Conductor Nozzles
1. Description: Bronze body with threaded inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting
holes.
2. Size: Same as connected conductor.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor Cleanouts

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule, heavy-
duty, adjustable housing, threaded, adjustable housing cleanouts.
4. Type: Adjustable housing, Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule, Heavy-duty,
adjustable housing, Threaded, adjustable housing.
5. Body or Ferrule Material: Cast iron.
7. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
8. Closure: Cast-iron plug.
9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads set-screws or other device.
10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy
11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round or Square.
12. Top-Loading Classification: Extra-Heavy Duty or Heavy Duty .
13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to
cleanout.
B. Test Tees

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for
cleanout test tees.
4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil-
pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5. Closure Plug: Countersunk orraised head.
C. Wall Cleanouts

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M, for cleanouts. Include wall access.

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron

soil-pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head drilled-and-threadedbrasscast-iron plug.
7. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw.
8. Wall Access: Round stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
D. Plastic Floor Cleanouts

3. Body Material: PVC.
4. Closure Plug: PVC.
5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage piping.
2.4 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Cast-Iron, Horizontal Backwater Valves

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1, for backwater valves.
5. Cover: Cast iron with boltedor threaded access check valve.
6. End Connections: Hub and spigotor hubless.
7. Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified
to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition.
8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
B. Cast-Iron, Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet.
3. Body Material: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of
floor drain.
4. Check Valve: Removable ball float.
5. Inlet: Threaded.
6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot.
C. Plastic, Horizontal Backwater Valves

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1, for backwater valves.
4. Body Material: ABS or PVC.
5. Cover: Same material as body with threaded access to check valve.
6. Check Valve: Removable swing check.
7. End Connections: Socket type.
2.5 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3, for trench drains.
4. Flange: Anchor with weep holes

6. Outlet: Bottom.
7. Grate Material: Ductile iron or stainless steel.
8. Grate Finish: Not required.
9. Top-Loading Classification: Extra-Heavy Duty or Heavy Duty.
2.6 THROUGH-PENETRATIONFIRESTOPASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies

2. Standard: ASTM E 814, for through-penetration firestop assemblies.
3. Certification and Listing: Intertek Testing Service or any testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdictionfor through-penetration firestop assemblies.
4. Size: Same as connected pipe.
5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC
protective cap for plug.
7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.7 FLASHING M ATERIALS
A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).
B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-
inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-
mm) minimum thickness.
D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet
metal downspouts.
C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 6 inches (152 mm to 18 inches (457 mm above
grade. Secure to building wall.

D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following
instructions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4
(DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100)
and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping.
4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
H. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor.
I. Install drain-outlet backwater valves in outlet of drains.
J. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.
K. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.
L. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished surface unless otherwise indicated.
M. Assemble channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written

N. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at concrete floor

penetrations.
O. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m) lead sheets, 0.0938-inch (2.4-
mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m) lead sheets,
0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10
inches (250 mm) and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around
pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm)
around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches (200 mm) around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris
and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Plumbing Fixtures SECTION 15410
PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................................... 2
1.6 W ARRANTY .............................................................................................................................. 4
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 4
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS ................................................................................................................. 5
2.4 SHOWER FAUCETS ................................................................................................................... 5
2.5 SINK FAUCETS.......................................................................................................................... 5
2.6 LAMINAR-FLOW FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS ................................................................................. 5
2.7 FLUSHOMETERS ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.8 TOILET SEATS .......................................................................................................................... 5
2.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS .............................................................................................. 6
2.10 FIXTURE SUPPORTS .................................................................................................................. 6
2.11 INTERCEPTORS.......................................................................................................................... 6
2.14 OTHER PLUMBING & SANITARY FIXTURES ................................................................................... 7
PART 3 – EXECUTION .......................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 EXAMINATION ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 8
3.5 ADJUSTING ............................................................................................................................... 9
3.6 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................ 9
3.7 PROTECTION ............................................................................................................................ 9
3.8 DEMONSTRATION....................................................................................................................... 9

Plumbing Fixture.doc
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
enhanced commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of the
EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1. Faucets for lavatories, bathtubs, bathtub/showers, showers and sinks.

2. Laminar-flow faucet-spout outlets.
3. Flushometers.
4. Toilet seats.
5. Protective shielding guards.
6. Fixture supports.
7. Interceptors.
8. Shower receptors.
9. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.

1. Division 10 Section “Toilet and Bath Accessories.”
2. Division 15 Section 15145, 15155, 15165 "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers,
floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.
3. Division 15 Section 15471 "Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters.
4. Architectural data sheets for other plumbing fixtures (e.g. water closet, urinal, lavatory,
sinks, etc) not included in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people
with disabilities.
C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble

and solid-surface materials.
D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.
E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and
tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves
are included where indicated.
F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-,

scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials
and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit WE 2, 3.1, and 3.2 Documentation indicating flow and water
consumption requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities "Architectural Barriers Act” and “Disabilities Act" for plumbing fixtures
for people with disabilities.
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Philippines, "Energy Policy Act,"

about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects,"
for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.

2. Plastic Bathtubs: ANSI Z124.1.
3. Plastic Lavatories: ANSI Z124.3.
4. Plastic Laundry Trays: ANSI Z124.6.
5. Plastic Mop-Service Basins: ANSI Z124.6.
6. Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2.

7. Plastic Sinks: ANSI Z124.6.

8. Plastic Urinal Fixtures: ANSI Z124.9.
9. Plastic Whirlpool Bathtubs: ANSI Z124.1 and ASME A112.19.7M.
10. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.
11. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462.
12. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
13. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction.
14. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.
15. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
16. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
17. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.
18. Whirlpool Bathtub Fittings: ASME A112.19.8M.
H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M.
2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for bathtub,
bathtub/shower and shower faucets:
1. Backflow Protection Devices for Hand-Held Showers: ASME A112.18.3M.

2. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets:
ASSE 1016.
3. Deck-Mounted Bath/Shower Transfer Valves: ASME 18.7.
4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
5. Hand-Held Showers: ASSE 1014.
6. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445.
8. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
10. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
11. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
12. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016.
J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.

2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
4. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
5. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
6. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
7. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

K. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430.

2. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.
3. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
4. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.
5. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446.
7. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499.
8. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
10. Plastic Shower Receptors: ANSI Z124.2.
11. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
12. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
13. Whirlpool Bathtub Equipment: UL 1795.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial
Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
5. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA M ATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 12 of each type.
4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
5. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but
no fewer than 2 of each type.
6. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
7. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

8. Dry Urinal Trap-Seal Cartridges: Equal to 200 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 12 of each type.
9. Dry Urinal Trap-Seal Liquid: Equal to 1 gal (3.8 L) for each urinal installed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. Lavatory Faucets
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lavatory

faucets in accordance with that specified in the Architectural data sheets.
2.4 SHOWER FAUCETS
A. Shower Faucets
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide shower

2.5 SINK FAUCETS
A. Sink Faucets
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sink

2.6 LAMINAR-FLOW FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS
A. Laminar-Flow Faucet-Spout Outlets
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide laminar-

flow faucets-spout outlets in accordance with that specified in the Architectural data
sheets.
2.7 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Flushometers
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

flushometers in accordance with that specified in the Architectural data sheets.
2.8 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet seats

in accordance with that specified in the Architectural data sheets.

2.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers
1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot-water supply
and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:
1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and
cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
2.10 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Accordance with that specified in the Architectural data sheets.
B. Water-Closet Supports:
1. Description: Combination carrier designed for both accessible or standard mounting

height of wall-mounting, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or double, vertical or
horizontal, hub-and-spigot or hubless waste fitting as required for piping arrangement;
faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and hardware matching
fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for installation in wide
pipe space. Additional descriptions as provided in the Architectural data sheets.
C. Urinal Supports:
1. Description: Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and
fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. II, urinal carrier with hanger and bearing
plates for wall-mounting, urinal-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. Additional
descriptions as provided in the Architectural data sheets.
2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
D. Lavatory Supports:
1. Description: Type I, lavatory carrier with exposed arms and tie rods. II, lavatory carrier
with concealed arms and tie rod. III, lavatory carrier with hanger plate and tie rod for
wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. Additional
descriptions as provided in the Architectural data sheets.
2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
E. Sink Supports:
1. Description: Type I, sink carrier with exposed arms and tie rods. II, sink carrier with
hanger plate, bearing studs, and tie rod. III, sink carrier with hanger plate and exposed
arms for sink-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet. Additional descriptions as
provided in the Architectural data sheets.
2.11 INTERCEPTORS

2.14 OTHER PLUMBING & SANITARY FIXTURES
A. Detailed description of the following plumbing fixtures is available in the Architectural data
sheets:
1. Water closets.
2. Urinals.
3. Lavatories.
4. Commercial sinks.
5. Wash fountains.
6. Individual showers.
7. Group showers.
8. Kitchen sinks.
9. Service sinks.
10. Service basins.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building

substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall
bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind
fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Division 15 Section 15111 "General Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to
drainage system.
L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on
wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with
disabilities to reach.
M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
N. Install toilet seats on water closets.
O. Install trap-seal liquid in dry urinals.
P. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
Q. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop
valves.
R. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
S. Install traps on fixture outlets.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
T. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where
indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
U. Install in sink deck or on countertop at sink. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling
penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-
pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
V. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified
in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where
installed.
B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified
components.
C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B. Operate and adjust hot-water dispensers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect
exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
EMPLOYER.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Packaged Booster Pumps SECTION 15444
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SUMMARY................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF W ORK ........................................................................................................... 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE............................................................................................................... 2
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ........................................................................................ 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................. 2
2.1 W ATER PUMPS ........................................................................................................................ 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 EXAMINATION .......................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................................................................... 6
3.3 CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 6
3.4 IDENTIFICATION........................................................................................................................ 6
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ......................................................................................................... 7
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE ................................................................................................................... 7
3.7 ADJUSTING .............................................................................................................................. 7
3.8 DEMONSTRATION ..................................................................................................................... 7

Packaged Booster Pumps.DOC
SECTION 15444
PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
and other sections referenced. These include, but are not limited to, commissioning, enhanced
commissioning, preparation of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of the
EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Simplex, constant-speed booster pumps.

2. Multiplex, constant-speed booster pumps.
3. Simplex, variable-speed booster pumps.
4. Multiplex, variable-speed booster pumps.
1. Division 15 Section 15441 "Domestic Water Pumps" for domestic-water circulation

pumps.
2. Division 15 Section 15450 "Potable-Water Storage Tanks" for separate
hydropneumatic domestic-water tanks for multiplex booster pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable-frequency controller(s).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For booster pumps. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
a. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For booster pumps, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.
i. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is

based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

ii. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
iii. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
iv. Operation and Maintenance Data: For booster pumps to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.
B. Comply with Section 15010.
C. Provide as necessary for a complete system of plumbing equipment, as indicated on the

Drawings and as specified.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.
a. UL Compliance for Packaged Pumping Systems:
i. UL 508, "Industrial Control Equipment."

ii. UL 508A, "Industrial Control Panels."
iii. UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps."
iv. UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."
b. Booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective covers during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER PUMPS
A. General:
1. Pumps shall be so selected that the operating duty point is within 5% of the maximum
efficiency point. The pump casing so selected shall have ample space to take an impeller
one size larger than that capable of performing the operating duty.
2. The pump shall have a speed of not more than 1500 rpm unless otherwise approved by
the MEEPF CONSULTANT. All pumps and motors shall be of minimum vibration and
noise level during operation. Vibration isolators shall be provided for all pump sets.
3. Facilities shall be provided to prevent starting of pumps when the water tank is at low
water level. An indicator for this low water level alarm shall be provided and interfaced
with the Building Management System.

4. Facilities to select which pump to be duty pump and standby pump automatically shall be
provided and be interchangeable.
5. Leakage from pump gland shall be drained to the nearest floor waste.
6. Pump curves for all pumps offered shall be submitted. All curve indicating excessive shut-
off head will not be approved.
7. Each pump shall be provided with a gate valve at suction and discharge, approved check
valve at discharge, approved strainer at suction, flexible connections at pump suction and
discharge, eccentric reducer at suction, concentric reducer at discharge, pressure gauges
at suction and discharge, circulation relief valve and automatic air relief valve.
8. Appropriate vibration isolation mountings shall be provided for each pump sets.
9. Supply and install a control panel on 16 swg drip proof metal cubicle enclosing the control
switchgear and other electrical and control components for each pumping installation. All
sensors shall be connected to a separate extra-low voltage termination compartment
within the control panel.
10. Power supply to all sensors and external devices associated to the control and monitoring
of the pumps and tanks shall be taken from the pump control panel.
B. Pumps:
1. Pumps shall be of capacities as shown on the drawings.
2. Pumps shall be horizontal end suction/vertical in-line, single inlet centrifugal pumps with
variable speed control. Pumps shall be complete with mechanical seals with its faces of
tungsten carbide against tungsten carbide. The pump shaft shall be of 316 stainless steel,
spline type, while the impellers, intermediate chambers and outer sleeve shall be of 304
stainless steel or bronze. The cast iron parts in contact with water shall be electro-coated
with primer so as to prevent the formation of rust.
3. Each pump shall be checked and regulated for proper differential pressure, voltage and
amperage draw. This data shall be noted on a permanent tag or label and fastened to the
pump for EMPLOYER reference.
4. Pressure Rating: Refer to Section 15140 “Domestic Water Pipng”.
C. Floatless Type Level Switch in Water Tanks:
1. Supply and install floatless type switch probes in the water tanks as indicated below and
shown on the drawings.
a. Main RC Water Tanks at Underground Level
1) High level alarm (over-flow);
2) Low level alarm;
3) Low level cut-out of booster pumps;
4) Earthing probe.
2. Each probe shall be of the correct length for the particular application and tank location.
Electrodes shall be of polished stainless steel 20 mm OD. Electrode holders shall be
weatherproof in all respect.

3. The earthing probes shall be connected and wired to the building earth systems of the
building.
4. Each set of electrodes shall be installed inside a 230 mm diameter PVC pipe acting as a
wave barrier.
5. The level switch set shall operate with a stepped down voltage at 24V maximum. Stepped
down transformers shall be provided for each set of control probes and shall be installed
inside centralised control cubicles inside pump room.
6. Mechanical steel stuffing boxes shall be used.
D. Control of Duty / Standby Pumps:
1. Operation of the duty and standby pumps shall be carried out by the following method:
a. Automatically by means of pressure sensor (i.e. pressure switches);
b. Manually by means of a local start/stop push buttons on pump local motor control
panel and emergency stop switch.
c. The pressure switch shall be installed next to the manual release valve. When the
pressure drops to the pre-determined level, a signal will be sent to the pump local
motor control panel to start the pump.
d. Automatic controls shall be operated by electronic, floatless type level switches.
E. Pump Indicator:
1. The following audible and visible indication shall be provided at the pump local control
panels as applicable:
a. Red "overflow level" indicator with buzzer for the associated water tanks;
b. Amber "extra high water level" indicator for the associated water tank;
c. Amber "high water level" indicator;
d. Amber "low water level" indicator;
e. Red "pump trip" indicator for each pump;
f. Green "pump on" indicator for each pump;
g. "Pump electrical supply healthy" indicator for each pump;
h. Amber "remote/local" status indicator.
2.2 DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMP SETS (VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE)
A. The fully automatic domestic water booster set with variable speed controller shall be of robust
design, supplied ready for connection. Booster pumps and pressure tanks shall be mounted on
a vibration – absorbing mild steel baseplate. Each set shall comprise of the following:
1. Triplex type approved pattern horizontal and suction/suction vertical line centrifugal
pumps.
2. One (1) set pressure tank with rubber bag.

3. One set factory assembled pre-wired fully automatic control cubicle (variable speed
controller) in weather-proof mild steel enamel finished steel enclosure.
4. Associate pipework including control valves, water hammer absorbers, check valves,
flexible connectors, pressure regulating valves, located in the common pump delivery pipe
etc.
5. Vibration-absorbing baseplate.
6. Pressure gauges, pressure switches, and safety valves, etc.
7. Thermal relay, indicator lamp, fuse magnetic controller auxiliary relay, alternative relay,
terminal board.
8. 70% pump efficiency.
B. Sequence of Operation Triplex: System sequencing shall be such that the lead pump will
handle demand from 0% to 20% of system requirements. As the demand exceeds 20%, the
number 1 main pump will come on line, handling demands to 40% of total system capacity, and
the lead pump will be shut off. As demand exceeds 40%, the lead pump will be reactivated and
will function in conjunction with the number 1 main pump to develop flows to 60% of the total
demand. As demand exceeds 60% of the total, the number 2 main pump is activated the lead
pump deactivated, and the numbers 1 and 2 main pumps will handle capacities to 80%. As
demand exceeds 80%, the lead pump is reactivated, the three pumps operate together, and
100% of system flow is supplied. Pumps shut off in reverse order.
C. Pressure tank shall be of carbon steel cylindrical pre-changed pressure vessel with epoxy or
polypropylene anti-corrosion lining in the internal surface. A rubber bag shall be fitted for
separation of the water nitrogen gas. Externally treated in synthetic enamel. An approved type
valve shall be fitted for pre-pressure adjustment. Baseplate is manufactured in heavy gauge
fabricated mild steel, zinc plate finish.
D. All pipings, flexible connectors, gate valve and non-return valves shall be as described in the
Pipework, Fitting and Valves Section.’
The following accessories shall be provided;
1. One (1) no. pressure gauge with syphon pipes and isolating valves in the pressure tank air
chamber.
2. Three (3) nos. adjustable pressure switches for incoming and outgoing pressure
adjustable individually and low water pressure (no flow) cut-out of booster pumps.
3. One (1) no. bronze drain cock at the bottom of the pressure tank.
4. One (1) no. 25mm diaphragm type safety valve at the air chamber of pressure tank.
A test certificate for the performance and test pressure of the tank issued by the manufacturer
must be submitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for booster pumps to verify actual locations of piping connections before
booster-pump installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install booster pumps on concrete base using elastomeric pads
restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 3
Section Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm).

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
equipment.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install booster pumps using elastomeric pads restrained spring
isolators. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 15
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm)
C. Support connected domestic-water piping so weight of piping is not supported by booster

pumps.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Coordinate booster-pump installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on

Drawings and with requirements specified in piping systems. If Drawings are explicit enough,
these requirements may be reduced or omitted.
B. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Connect domestic-water piping to booster pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe
equal to or greater than size of system suction and discharge piping.
2. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge

piping. Install ball, butterfly, or gate valves same size as suction and discharge piping.
Comply with requirements for general-duty valves specified in Division 15 Section
"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
3. Install union, flanged, or grooved-joint connections on suction and discharge piping at
connection to domestic-water piping. Comply with requirements for unions and
flanges specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
4. Install valved bypass, same size as and between piping, at connections to booster-
pump suction and discharge piping. Comply with requirements for domestic-water
piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
5. Install flexible connectors, same size as piping, on piping connections to booster-
pump suction and discharge piping. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors
specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
6. Install piping adjacent to booster pumps to allow service and maintenance.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

A. Retain first paragraph below to require a factory-authorized service representative to perform

inspections, tests, and adjustments.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster pumps to
confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation.
and equipment.
D. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust booster pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust pressure set points.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within twelve (12) months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting booster pump to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two (2) visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours
for this purpose.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train EMPLOYER’S maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain booster pumps.
Refer to Section 17100 “Commissioning for additional requirements.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Water Storage Tanks SECTION 15450
PART 1 - GENERAL...............................................................................................................................1
1.2 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS.............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.6 COORDINATION ......................................................................................................................... 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................2
2.1 MANUFACTURERS...................................................................................................................... 2
2.2 PLASTIC, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-W ATER STORAGE TANKS ..................................................... 2
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................... 2
PART 3 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................3
3.1 CONCRETE BASES ..................................................................................................................... 3
3.2 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 3
3.3 CONNECTIONS........................................................................................................................... 4
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL........................................................................................................... 4
3.5 CLEANING ................................................................................................................................. 4
3.6 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................................................ 5
3.7 DEMONSTRATION....................................................................................................................... 5

S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\04-PLUMBING\15450-Water
Storage Tanks.docx
SECTION 15450
WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Division 15 will be responsible to carry out the commissioning requirements specified in

Sections 17100, 17105, 117107, 17108, 17110 and other sections referenced in 17100.
These include, but are not limited to, commissioning, enhanced commissioning, preparation
of a detailed O&M manual, and detailed training of the EMPLOYER’S personnel.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water storage tanks and related accessories for indoor installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thickness, insulation, finishes and coatings, required
clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping connections.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that potable-water storage

tanks comply with requirements.
C. Source quality-control test reports.

D. Purging and disinfecting reports.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of potable-
water storage tanks and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."

Storage Tanks.docx
B. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, potable-water storage tanks
to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, where
indicated.
C. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label FRP, potable-water storage tanks to
comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.
D. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
potable-water storage tanks and components. Include appropriate NSF marking.
E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1 to
9," for potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 “Structural”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 M ANUFACTURERS
product selection:
2.2 PLASTIC, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-W ATER STORAGE T ANKS
A. FRP, Water Storage Tanks:
2. Description: FRP, vertical, nonpressure-rated water tank; complying with NSF 61

barrier materials for potable-water tanks.
3. Construction: ASTM D 4097, contact-molded FRP.
4. Tappings: Factory-fabricated, FRP flanged-end nozzle.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Include plastic-to-steel transition fitting from tank
nozzle flange to ASME B1.20.1, female thread.
1) Exception: Tappings may be threaded FRP coupling integral with nozzle

for connections for plastic piping.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
5. Vertical Tank Support: Separate factory-fabricated steel stand, capable of supporting

tank.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and
Storage Tanks.docx
inspections and prepare test reports:

Storage Tanks.docx
1. Pressure Testing for ASME-Code, Water Storage Tanks: Hydrostatically test to

ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air,
pressurize to 1-1/2 times tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold
pressure for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks. Replace tanks
that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.
2. Pressure Testing for Non-ASME-Code, Pressure, Water Storage Tanks:
Hydrostatically test to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks at pressure
of 50 psig (345 kPa) above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig
(1035 kPa). Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize tanks, disconnect test
equipment, hold pressure for two hours with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks.
Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until test is
satisfactory.
3. Nonpressure Testing for Water Storage Tanks: Fill tanks to water operating level to
ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours
with no drop in water level. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks, and
repeat until test is satisfactory.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for tanks. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
2. For supported tanks, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported tanks.
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so
devices needing servicing are accessible.
1. Install horizontal tanks on concrete piers and factory-fabricated saddles.
B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
1. Use steel or FRP straps over or around plastic tanks.
C. Install tank seismic restraints.
D. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping, if indicated.
E. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:
1. Pressure relief valves.

2. Temperature and pressure relief valves.
3. Vacuum relief valves.
Storage Tanks.docx
4. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks.

5. Connections to accessories.
F. After installing tanks with factory finish, inspect finishes and repair damages to finishes.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to potable-water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves.
Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.
1. General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section 15111 "General Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
a. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gate or ball.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Gate or butterfly.
c. Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or
nipple in outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose
service, threaded cap, and chain.
2. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric

fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
3. Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball
valves. Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings.
A. Perform the following final checks before filling:
1. Verify that air precharge in precharged tanks is correct.

2. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
3. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.
a. Manually operate pressure relief valves.

b. Adjust pressure settings.
4. Verify that vacuum relief valves are correct size.
a. Manually operate vacuum relief valves.

b. Adjust vacuum settings.
B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to
operating level.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water storage tanks.
B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:
1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.

2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
Storage Tanks.docx
a. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is
not present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows
evidence of contamination.
C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to
Section 17100 "Commissioning."
END OF SECTION

Storage Tanks.docx
DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Firestopping SECTION 15480
PART 1- GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 RELATED WORK ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE ............................................................................................................ 1
1.5 GUARANTEE .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 2

2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................. 2
2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS ................................................................................... 3
PART 3 – EXECUTION .......................................................................................................................... 3

3.1 EXAMINATION ............................................................................................................................ 3
3.2 PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 3
3.3 INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................ 3
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF W ORK ...................................................................................... 4

Firestopping.doc
SECTION 15480
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame,
heat, and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction.
B. Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke parti-

tions.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01340 - Samples and Shop Drawings
B. Section 15010 - General Provisions
C. Section 15840 - Ductwork and Accessories: Fire and smoke damper assem-
bles in ductwork
D. Section 3 Part9 - Adhesives, Caulking, Sealants and Fasteners.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. All submittals shall be certified approved
by the manufacturer’s representative prior to submission to the MEEPF
CONSULTANT.
B. Manufacturers literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping

and smoke stopping used.
C. List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed.
D. Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E814 tests for systems not listed by FM,
UL, or WH proposed for use.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and
product identification.
B. Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements.
1.5 GUARANTEE
Firestopping work subject to the terms of the Article GUARANTY of Section 15010 , except
extend the guaranty period to five years.
FM, UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable.

Firestopping.doc
1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
Publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
C. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM):
Annual Issue Approval Guide Building Materials
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through - Penetration Fire Stops
Annual Issue Building Materials Directory
Annual Issue Fire Resistance Directory
E. Warnock Hersey (WH):
Annual Issue Certification Listings
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected through-Penetration Fire-
stop Systems to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the
fire barrier and stop the passage of gases of smoke.
B. Through-Penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with

ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the “F” or “T” rating to maintain the same rating and in-
tegrity as the fire barrier being sealed. “T” ratings are not required for penetrations
smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m² (16 sq.in) in overall
cross sectional area.
C. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit
a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.
D. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following proper-
ties:
1. Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.
2. Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of
products.
3. Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, con-
densation or transient water exposure.
4. When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished
with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor sur-
face.

Firestopping.doc
E. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or
conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following
properties:
1. Classified for used with the particular type of penetrating material used.
2. Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables and
communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unre-
stricted cable changes without damage to the seal.
3. Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as
fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.
F. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accor-

dance with ASTM E84.
G. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM

E814.
H. Materials to be asbestos free.
2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS
A. Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in Section 3 Part 9.
B. Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant.
C. Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
D. When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar sur-
face treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.
3.1 EXAMINATION
Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on
site examination of areas to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence
and bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials.
B. Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either
side of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the
firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the
proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved.
B. Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or
other approved system details and installation instructions.
C. Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions.

Firestopping.doc
3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
A. As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris.
B. Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until com-
pleted work is inspected and accepted by the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
C. Clean up spills of liquid type materials.
D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S Installation of all firestopping materials and products

shall be closely supervised by manufacturer’s representative.
E. Regular inspection shall be done by the manufacturer’s representative to ascertain

that the works are being done according to the design intent. A copy of the inspection
report with all its findings and recommendations including the corrective works im-
plemented shall be forwarded to the MEEPF CONSULTANT on regular basis.
END OF SECTION

Firestopping.doc
DIVISION 15 – PLUMBING Air to Water Heat Pump Water Heaters SECTION 15745
PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY................................................................................................................................ 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................... 2
1.5 COORDINATION ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.6 WARRANTY ............................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 AIR-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP WATER HEATERS .................................................................. 3
2.3 STORAGE TANKS ................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS ................................................................................................ 11
2.5 HEAT RECLAIMERS .............................................................................................................. 12
2.6 COMPRESSION TANKS ........................................................................................................ 13
2.7 HEAT-EXCHANGER ACCESSORIES ................................................................................... 13
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................................................. 14
PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 14
3.2 CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 15
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................... 15
3.4 DEMONSTRATION ................................................................................................................ 15

S:\admin\mpi\MP1716_Baguio General Hospital and Medical Trauma Center\000 - ACTIVE DOCUMENTS\09 - SPECS\2018-04-06_100% DD\04-PLUMBING\15745-Air
To Water Heat Pump Water Heaters.doc
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following heat pumps, heat exchangers and accessories:
1. Heat Pumps equipped with air to water instantaneous heating coils.

2. Compressor : Copeland/Hitachi Scroll
(National Rotary for FF-02)
3. Jacket : Stainless 316 Steel Plate
(Shall be weather-proof & suitable for marine
environment
4. User Interface : LCD display Control Panel
5. Copper Tube heat exchanger
6. Heat Exchanger : Double Wall
7. System Protection Feature : Automatic unit on/off timer clock;
Insufficient water flow protection;
High/Low pressure protection
8. Storage Tank
9. Inner Tank Lining : All internal surfaces exposed to water are
glass-lined per ASME HLW code procedure
NSF approved glass lining compound
(ASME construction on all tanks greater than
320 gallons capacity and meeting ASHRAE
Standards).
10. Expansion Valves
11. Pressure Relief Valves
12. Additional Protection : Cathodic protection (anode rods) provided
13. Circulators
14. Compression tanks
15. Heat pump accessories
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of heat exchanger indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Shop Drawings: Heat pump layout, storage tanks, complete with piping works and other
appurtenances.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of heat pumps, storage tanks, circulators and other
appurtenances shall be signed by product manufacturer.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that heat exchangers,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:


F. Source quality-control test reports.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hot water system to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of heat pumps and storage hot water tanks through
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of heat
exchangers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

D. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label heat-
exchanger storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1.
E. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9" for all components that will be in contact with water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of heat exchangers that failed in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tanks, valves, and

supports.
b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Heat Pumps:
1) Tube Coil and Shell: Five (5) years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Five (5) years.
b. Circulating, Storage Tanks:
1) Storage Tank: Five (5) years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Five (5) years.
c. Compression Tanks: Five (5) year(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the manufacturers specified.
2.2 AIR-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP WATER HEATERS
The water heater shall be air-to-water heat contact transfer system through heat pumps.
The heat pump works by taking the surrounding air and using it to heat the low pressure
liquid refrigerant in the heat pump’s evaporator, vaporizing the liquid. The refrigerant then
passes through the compressor, which raises the refrigerant pressure and thus temperature
as well. The heated refrigerant gas passes through the heat pump condenser, where it
gives off heat to the water and condenses back into the liquid state. The liquid refrigerant
now passes through an expansion valve where the pressure is reduced and the cycle starts
again over thus generating the hot water requirement.
The units cabinet shall be constructed of formed, painted aluminum panels, weather-
resistant, suitable to marine environment superior to corrosion resistance. All unit fasteners
shall be coated with zinc-based plating corrosion resistance. The panels shall be insulated
with matte-finish, fiberglass insulation for thermal barrier and noise reduction. The cooling
coil drain pan shall be constructed of stainless steel. Units shall come equipped with MERV-
8 rated, two inch pleated air filters.
The refrigeration circuit shall consist of a minimum of a scroll-type compressor, suction line
accumulator, direct expansion valve, liquid line filter dryer, sight glass, cooling coil (copper
tube and aluminum finish) and a brazed plate refrigerant to water heat exchanger stainless
steel, double-wall). The refrigerant tubing shall be ACR rated and brazed with a 15% silver
alloy. The suction line and suction line accumulator shall be totally insulated. A unit

mounted circulating pump shall pump water between the storage tank and heat pump.
Female pipe thread flanges shall be provided for easy water connections to the unit.
The blower assembly shall consist of a double inlet forward curved blower, an open drip-
proof motor, drive belt and adjustable sheaves. The blower assembly shall be mounted on
vibration pads to reduce vibration noise through the unit cabinet. The compressor shall be
protected by high and low pressure switches as well as thermal overload. A unit mounted
phase monitor shall protect the motors from phase loss or undercurrent conditions.
1. Heat Pumps equipped with air to water instantaneous heating coils/tube:
2. Manufacturers:
a. A.O. Smith Water Products (USA)
3. Description: Packaged assembly of hot water storage tank, heat-exchanger coils,

controls, heat pumps, and specialties for heating domestic water in heat-exchanger
coils.
4. Construction: ASME-code, negligible-capacity, glass-lined, carbon-steel shell with
150-psig (1035-kPa) - 125 (kPa) minimum working-pressure rating.
a. Tapping: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell.

Attach tapping to shell before testing and labeling.
1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to

ASME B1.20.1.
2) NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5
for steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for
copper and copper-alloy flanges.
b. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated,

and suitable for operating temperature. Surround entire shell and nozzle
except connections and controls.
c. Heat-Exchanger Coils: Copper tube coils for heating with pressure rating equal
to or greater than heating supply pressure.
d. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat that operates control valve and
that is capable of maintaining outlet-water temperature within 4°F (2°C) of
setting.
e. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
f. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3,
for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include one or more
relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of heat exchanger.
Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
5. Miscellaneous Components for Heating Hot-Water Unit: Control valve, valves, and
piping. Include components fitted for pneumatic control.
6. Stand: Factory fabricated for floor mounting
7. Capacity and Characteristics:
a. Flow Rate: 1285 L/H at 20°C (68°F) temperature rise.

b. Hot-Water Temperature Setting: 60°C (140°F)
c. Heating Hot-Water Supply:
1) Inlet Temperature: 20°C (68°F)

2) Outlet Temperature: 60°C (140°F)
3) Pipe Size: As per manufacturer’s recommendations
d. Condensate Pipe Size: DN 50

e. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts : 400V
2) Phases: 3 phase
3) Hertz : 60Hz
B. Domestic Water-in-Coil, Instantaneous Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Electric Heater Company (The); Hubbell Heaters Division.

b. Graham Corporation.
c. Leslie Controls, Inc.
2. Description: Tankless, packaged assembly of heat-exchanger coils, controls, and

specialties for heating domestic water in coils with steam in shell.
3. Construction: ASME code, with carbon steel shell for steam.
a. Cast-Iron Shell Pressure Rating: 75 psig (517 kPa).

b. Steel Shell Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated,
4. Heat-Exchanger Coils/Tube: Spiral-wound, copper coils/Tube for domestic water.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat that operates steam-control valve and
that is capable of maintaining outlet-water temperature within 3°F (2°C) of setting.
6. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
7. Miscellaneous Components: Strainers, control valve, valves, and piping.
8. Stand: Factory fabricated for floor mounting.
a. Flow Rate: 1285 (LPH)> at 100°F (56 °C) tempera ture rise.
c. Condensate Pipe Size: DN 50
d. Electrical Characteristics:
1) Volts : 400V
2) Phases: 3 phase
3) Hertz : 60 Hz
C. Heating-Fluid-in-Tube/Coils, Instantaneous Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Adamson Global Technology Corp.

b. Ajax Boiler Inc.
c. Armstrong International, Inc.
d. Cemline Corporation.
e. HESco Industries, Inc.
f. Leslie Controls, Inc.
g. Patterson-Kelley.
h. Precision Boilers.
i. PVI Industries, LLC.
j. RECO USA.
k. Sellers Engineering Co.
2. Description: Tankless, packaged assembly of heat-exchanger coil/tube, controls, and

specialties for heating domestic water in shell with heating hot water in coil.
3. Construction: ASME-code, negligible-capacity, copper-lined, carbon-steel or copper-
alloy shell with 150-psig (1035-kPa) 125 psig (kPa) minimum working-pressure rating.

a. Configuration: Horizontal.
b. Shell Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with water heater
shell. Attached tappings to shell before testing and labeling.

ASME B1.20.1.

d. Heat-Exchanger Coil: Copper, double-wall, U tubes for heating fluid.
1) Tube Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than heating-fluid supply

pressure.
4. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat that operates steam-control valve and

that is capable of maintaining outlet-water temperature within 5°F (3°C) of setting.
5. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
6. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3, for
combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves
with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure
setting less than working-pressure rating of heat exchanger. Select one relief valve
with sensing element that extends into shell.
7. Miscellaneous Components for Heating Hot-Water Unit: Control valve, valves, and
piping. Include components fitted for pneumatic control.
8. Stand: Factory fabricated for floor mounting.
a. Flow Rate: 1285 LPH at 100°F (56°C) temperature rise.

1) Inlet Temperature: : 20°C (68°F)

3) Pipe Size: DN 50
d. Condensate Pipe Size: DN 50

e. Electrical Characteristics:
1) Volts : 400V
2) Phases: 3 Phase
3) Hertz : 60 Hz
2.3 STORAGE TANKS
A. Storage Tanks shall have threaded openings as shown drawings. Interior of tanks shall be
glass-lined with an alkaline borosilicate composition which has been fused to the steel by
firing at a temperature of 1600°F. Glass coating s hall be continuous over the entire inner
surface of the tank. Outer Jacket shall have a baked enamel finish. Foam insulation to
meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1-2004 efficiency requirements. Cathodic provision shall be
provided.
Tanks shall be constructed and stamped according to ASME specifications. Manhole (11 x
15), handhole (4x 6) or inspection openings (2-2) shall be installed in accordance with ASME
requirements and manufacturers standard practice. Lining shall be glass equipped with the
number and size of magnesium anode rods sufficient to provide adequate protection for the

tank lining. Tanks shall be horizontally mounted, design and provided with four (4) angle iron
legs, threaded leg sockets, ringbase and saddles.
B. Circulating, Compact Storage Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. A.O. Smith Water Products (USA)

b. Adamson Global Technology Corp.
c. Ajax Boiler Inc.
d. Cemline Corporation.
e. Patterson-Kelley.
f. PVI Industries, LLC.
g. RECO USA.
2. Description: Packaged, small-capacity, hot-water storage tank; circulator; controls;

and specialties for heating domestic water with heating hot water in coil.
3. Flow Pattern: Standard-flow arrangement, with water from bottom of storage tank
circulated across heat-exchanger coil and returned to tank. Include hot-water outlet
located at top of tank and temperature sensor in tank.
4. Storage Tank Construction: ASME-code, vertical; copper-silicon or corrosion-
resistant metal with 150-psig (1035-kPa) working-pressure rating. Include nozzle and
head for heat-exchanger tube coil.
a. Configuration: Vertical.
b. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach
tappings to tank before testing and labeling.

ASME B1.20.1.

and suitable for operating temperature. Surround entire storage tank and
nozzle except connections and controls.
5. Heat-Exchanger Coil: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) diameter, double-wall, copper or copper-
alloy, U tubes with tube sheet and supporting baffles.
a. Heat-Exchanger Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than heating-fluid supply

pressure.
6. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

7. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. Include
automatic low-water cutoff device or system.
with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
9. Gages: Factory-mounted thermometer and pressure gage.
10. Circulating Pump: UL 778, all-bronze, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately
coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3. Include mechanical seals,
150-psig (1035-kPa) 125 (kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, and 225°F (107°C)
continuous-water-temperature rating.
a. Pump Control: Sensor for operating pump and control valve.

11. Miscellaneous Components for Heating Hot-Water Units: Control valve, valves, and
piping.
12. Support: Factory mounted on skids.
13. Energy Management System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and
disabling heat exchanger.
a. Capacity: 1285 LPH

b. Recovery: 1028 LPH at 100°F (56°C) temperature rise.
c. Hot-Water Temperature Setting: 60°C (140°F)
d. Heating Hot-Water Supply:

e. Condensate Pipe Size: DN 50

f. Electrical Characteristics:
1) Volts : 400V
2) Phases: 3 Phase
3) Hertz : 60 HZ
C. Circulating, Storage Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:

b. Ajax Boiler Inc.
c. Cemline Corporation.
d. Electric Heater Company (The); Hubbell Heaters Division.
e. Patterson-Kelley.
f. PVI Industries, LLC.
g. RECO USA.
h. Sellers Engineering Co.
i. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
2. Description: Packaged, large-capacity, hot-water storage tank with heat-exchanger

coil, circulator, controls, and specialties for heating domestic water with heating hot
water in coil.
3. Flow Pattern: Standard-flow arrangement, with water from bottom of storage tank
circulated across heat-exchanger coil and returned to tank. Include hot-water outlet
located at top of tank and temperature sensor in tank.
4. Flow Pattern: Reverse-flow arrangement, with water from storage tank drawn across
heat-exchanger coil and returned to bottom of tank. Include hot-water outlet and
temperature sensor located in or at coil shell.
5. Storage Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 125-psig (860-kPa) 150-psig
(1035-kPa) I125 psig (kPa) working-pressure rating. Include nozzle and head for
heat-exchanger tube coils.
a. Configuration: Horizontal
b. Manhole: 11 by 15 inches (280 by 380 mm) in end head of horizontal storage
tank shell.
c. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach

ASME B1.20.1.

d. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.
e. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
f. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated,

pressure.
7. Temperature Control: Adjustable temperature aquastat, mounted in storage tank

shell head, unless otherwise indicated.
8. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. Include
automatic low-water cutoff device or system.
10. Gages: Factory-mounted thermometer and pressure gage.
11. Circulating Pump: UL 778, all-bronze, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately
coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3. Include mechanical seals,
150-psig (1035-kPa) to 125 (kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, and 225°F
(107°C) continuous-water-temperature rating.
a. Pump Control: Sensor for operating pump and control valve.

13. Energy Management System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling and
disabling heat exchanger.

c. Hot-Water Temperature Setting: 60°C (140°F)
d. Heating Hot-Water Supply:

e. Condensate Pipe Size: DN 50

1) Volts : 400V
2) Phases: 3 Phase
3) Hertz : 60 Hz
D. Storage Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:

b. Ajax Boiler Inc.

c. Cemline Corporation.
d. Electric Heater Company (The); Hubbell Heaters Division.
e. HESco Industries, Inc.
f. Leslie Controls, Inc.
g. Patterson-Kelley.
h. Precision Boilers.
i. PVI Industries, LLC.
j. RECO USA.
k. Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
l. Weben-Jarco, Inc.
m. Wendland Mfg. Corp.
2. Description: Assembly of hot-water storage tank with separate heat-exchanger coil;

controls; and specialties for heating domestic water with heating hot water in coil.
3. Storage Tank Construction: ASME-code carbon steel with 150-psig (1035-kPa)
working-pressure rating. Include nozzle and head for heat-exchanger tube coil.
a. Configuration: Horizontal.
b. Manhole: 11 by 15 inches (280 by 380 mm) in end head of horizontal storage
tank shell.
c. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach

ASME B1.20.1.
d. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.
e. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
f. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated,

pressure.
5. Temperature Control: Adjustable temperature aquastat, mounted in storage tank

shell head, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Recovery: 1028 LPH at 100 °F (56°C) temperatur e rise.


d. Condensate Outlet Pipe Size: DN 50

e. Domestic Water Inlet and Outlet Pipe Size: As per manufacturer’s
Recommendations
1) Volts : 400V
2) Phases: 3 Phase
3) Hertz : 60 Hz
2.4 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Brazed-Plate Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Alfa Laval, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries.
c. Doucette Industries, Inc.
d. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers.
e. Triangle Tube/Phase III.
2. Description: Assembly of heat-exchanger plates, permanently brazed together, for

using heating hot water to heat domestic water.
3. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.
4. Plate Construction: double wall.
5. Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.
6. Connections: Stainless steel; threaded.



e. Domestic Water Inlet and Outlet Pipe Size: As per manufacturer’s
recommendations
B. Frame-and-Plate Heat Exchangers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Alfa Laval, Inc.

b. APV Systems.
c. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
d. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries.
e. FES Systems Inc.
f. Graham Corporation.
g. Mueller, Paul Company.
h. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers.
i. Tranter PHE, Inc.
j. Triangle Tube/Phase III.
2. Description: Assembly of non-fixed position, heat-exchanger plates, with frame, for

using heating hot water to heat domestic water.

3. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum.

4. Frame:
a. Carrying and Guide Bars: Stainless steel.

b. Fixed, Frame Plate; Pressure Plate; Support Column; and Nuts and Bolts:
Carbon steel.
5. Channel Plates:
a. Type: double wall.

b. Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Gasket Material: Butyl or acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber, suitable for potable
water.
6. Connections: Copper suitable for potable water.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
7. Protective Shroud: Steel, covering channel plates.

8. Insulation: Complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, unless otherwise indicated, and
suitable for operating temperature. Surround entire heat exchanger except
connections.


3) Pipe Size: : As per manufacturer’s recommendations

e. Domestic Water Inlet and Outlet Pipe Size: : As per manufacturer’s
recommendations
2.5 HEAT RECLAIMERS
A. Description: Waste-heat recovery device complying with and listed according to UL 207 for
heat reclaimers. Device includes vertical drainage tube with helical, domestic water preheat
coil around drainage tube.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Doucette Industries, Inc.
2. Drainage Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV, center, copper drainage tube of size
indicated.
3. Water Preheat Coil: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), copper water tube,
of size indicated attached to drainage tube.
a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) on potable-water supply tubing.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50) Drainage Tube:
1) Domestic Water Preheat Coil: NPS 3/8 (DN 10).

2) Unit Height: 30 inches (762 mm).
b. NPS 3 (DN 80) Drainage Tube:
1) Domestic Water Preheat Coil: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).

c. NPS 4 (DN 100) Drainage Tube:
1) Domestic-Water Preheat Coil: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).

2.6 COMPRESSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed,
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air pre-charge to minimum system-operating pressure at
tank.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AMTROL Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Flexcon Industries.
d. Honeywell Sparco.
e. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The).
f. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div.
g. State Industries, Inc.
h. Taco, Inc.
i. Watts Regulator Co.
j. Wessels Co.
2. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

b. Capacity Acceptable: 10 gal. (37.9 L) minimum.
c. Air Precharge Pressure:.
2.7 HEAT-EXCHANGER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input,
and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of heat exchanger. Select
relief valves with sensing element that extends into heat-exchanger storage tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3.
Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of heat exchanger.
C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect hot water storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction,
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test commercial hot water storage tanks before shipment to minimum of one
and one-half times pressure rating.
C. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers on concrete bases.
1. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic

B. Install heat pumps and hot water storage tanks level and plumb, according to layout
drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are
accessible.
C. Anchor heat pumps to substrate.
D. Install seismic restraints for the heat pumps and hot water storage tanks. Anchor to
substrate.
E. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tank shells of heat
exchangers with domestic water storage. Use relief valves with sensing elements that
extend into shells. Extend relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as water piping in
continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
F. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for heat
exchangers without storage. Extend relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as water
piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor
drain.
G. Install heat-exchanger drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open
drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for heat
exchangers that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing
Specialties" for hose-end drain valves.
H. Install thermometer on each heat-exchanger domestic-water inlet and outlet piping, and
install thermometer on each heat-exchanger heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
I. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger heating-fluid piping. Refer to Division 15 Section

"Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.
J. Fill heat exchangers with water.
K. Charge compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to heat pumps to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for
easy removal of heat exchangers.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper
operation.
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace heat pumps and hot water storage tanks that do not pass tests and
inspections and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures and Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION


TS Plumbing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TS Plumbing

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TS Plumbing

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAGUIO GENERAL HOSPITAL MEDICAL

CENTER - PROPOSED TRAUMA CENTER

Prepared by: MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES, INC.

Reg. No. : 2032

100% DESIGN DEVELOPMENT

1. Section 15007 - Alternative Equipment and Suppliers

2. Section 15010 - General Provisions

3. Section 15040 - Plumbing System Start Up

4. Section 15052 - Common Work Result for Plumbing

5. Section 15057 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing

6. Section 15061 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

7. Section 15073 - Vibration and Seismic Controls For Plumbing Piping

8. Section 15076 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

9. Section 15111 - General –Duty Valves For Plumbing Piping

10. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping

11. Section 15145 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties

12. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

13. Section 15155 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

14. Section 15160 - Storm Drainage Piping

15. Section 15165 - Storm Drainage Piping Specialties

16. Section 15410 - Plumbing Fixture

17. Section 15444 - Packaged Booster Pumps

18. Section 15450 - Water Storage Tank

19. Section 15480 - Firestopping

20. Section 15745 - Air to Water Heat Pump Water Heaters

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

PART 1 - INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

Spec. Base Bid Alternative Deduction

15082 Plumbing Thermobreak -

15150 Hubless Cast Tyler

15140 Polypropelene Pipes and Al Faidro Belden Neltex

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 3

Spec. Base Bid Alternative Deduction

15410 Water Press. Bermad OCV Amico

15160 HDPE Pipes & Fittings for Wavin Kingbull

15150 Polyvinyl Chloride Emerald Unitex Moldex

15444 Packaged Booster Pumps Aurora Goulds

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 2 of 3

Spec. Base Bid Alternative Deduction from

15410 Plumbing Toto -

15415 Grease Interceptor / Oil AGI Jaman- JPI

15480 Fire Stopping Materials Rectoseal

15200 Vibration Isolator, Seismic Mason Industries Kinetic Noise

15430 Water Heaters AO Smith

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 3 of 3

PART 1 – GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC.

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

1. Submission of technical specifications and samples of all supply items for

a. Potable water supply system complete in all respects including but

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 1 of 31

7. Provision for interfacing with others services and trades.

a. Hacking of non-structural wall and partitions to provide opening for

10. Testing and commissioning.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Drawings, specifications, codes and standards are minimum requirements. Where

C. Should any change in drawings or specifications be required to comply with the

MEINHARDT PHILIPPINES INC. Page 2 of 31

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

1. Where it is stated in these specifications to submit to Engineer for review,